YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
V795350
OWNER’S MANUAL
HTR-5490
U
AV Receiver
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the
space below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
0100HTR5490(U)-cv1/4 01.7.18, 9:33 AM1
I CAUTION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert
you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the
appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended
by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive
force, and uneven surfaces may cause the
product and cart combination to overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or
rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the
manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lighting – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into
the product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION
0101HTR5490_Cau_EN(U) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSSAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION II
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved
by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the
FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high
quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this
product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC
Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.
Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this
product in a residential environment will not result in
harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,
if not installed and used according to the instructions
found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee
that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and
“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one
of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC
– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular,
specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the
grounding system of the building, as close to the point of
cable entry as practical.
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are
required, be sure the service technician has used
replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have
the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric
shock, or other hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or
repairs to this product, ask the service technician to
perform safety checks to determine that the product is in
proper operating condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the
antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA
70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of
the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding
conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection
to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the
grounding electrode.
0101HTR5490_Cau_EN(U) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM3
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, and 20 cm on
the right and left, and at the back of this unit
— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,
vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical
shock, do not place this unit where it may get
exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this
unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a
room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation
inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Buring objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may
cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,
tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct
heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit
rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or
personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
III CAUTION
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than
specified is dangerous and may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any
damage resulting from use of this unit with a
voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an
electrical storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects
and/or liquid drops inside this unit.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long
periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding
that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China model only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage
BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment
by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through
loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
0101HTR5490_Cau_EN(U) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM4
1
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS ....................................................... 1
FEATURES ........................................................ 2
GETTING STARTED ....................................... 3
Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .................... 4
Front Panel ............................................................... 4
Remote Control ........................................................ 6
Using the Remote Control ........................................ 7
Front Panel Display .................................................. 8
Rear Panel ................................................................ 9
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP .......................................... 10
Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 10
Speaker Placement ................................................. 10
Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 11
CONNECTIONS ............................................. 14
Before Connecting Components ............................ 14
Connecting Video Components .............................. 14
Connecting Audio Components ............................. 16
Connecting to a Subwoofer .................................... 18
Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18
Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19
Turning on the Power ............................................. 20
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ..................... 21
OSD Modes ............................................................ 21
Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 21
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ..................... 22
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F ...
22
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS ....................................................... 23
Before You Begin ................................................... 23
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 23
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................ 25
Input Modes and Indications .................................. 27
Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28
Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ....................... 29
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING
(DSP) ............................................................ 31
Understanding Sound Fields .................................. 31
Hi-Fi DSP Programs............................................... 31
CINEMA-DSP ................................................. 32
Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP ............................ 32
CINEMA-DSP Programs ....................................... 34
TUNING ........................................................... 36
Connecting the Antennas ........................................ 36
Automatic and Manual Tuning ............................... 37
Presetting Stations .................................................. 38
Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 40
Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 40
BASIC RECORDING ..................................... 41
ADVANCED OPERATION
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .............. 42
Control Area ........................................................... 42
Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 43
Programming a New Remote Control Function
(Learn Feature) ................................................... 44
Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ..
45
One Button Clear .................................................... 45
Clearing Learned Functions, Renamed Source
Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes ............. 46
Each Component Control Area .............................. 47
SET MENU ...................................................... 52
Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU................. 52
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 53
2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 56
3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main
speakers)............................................................. 57
4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 57
5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 57
6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 58
7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 58
8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 59
9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 60
10 LFE LEVEL ..................................................... 60
11 DYNAMIC RANGE ......................................... 61
12 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 61
13 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 62
14 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 62
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT
SPEAKERS .................................................. 63
SLEEP TIMER ................................................ 64
Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 64
Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 64
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER
EDITING ..................................................... 65
What is a sound field? ............................................ 65
Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 65
Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 66
Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 66
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 67
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. 71
GLOSSARY ..................................................... 76
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 78
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:42 PM1
2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are
trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.
FEATURES
Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)
Main: 80 W + 80 W
Center: 80 W
Rear: 80 W + 80 W
Rear center: 80 W
Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder
◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS
Neo: 6 Decoder
◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
or DTS
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP
Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner
◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning
◆ Automatic Preset Tuning
◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset
Editing)
Other Features
◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter
◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 14 Items
for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video
System
◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance
Adjustment
◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other
Future Formats
◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing
Bass Response
◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in
Controlling This Unit
◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability
◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability
◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks
◆ Sleep Timer
◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes
and “Learning” Capability
◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the
original signal
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this
manual.
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.9, 4:50 PM2
3
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
1
2
3
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
Installing Batteries in the Remote
Control
Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the
+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings
(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-
4) according to the polarity markings on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
■ Notes on batteries
• Change the batteries periodically.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline
and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging
carefully as these different types of batteries may have
the same shape and color.
■ Changing batteries
As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the
remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash
or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these
conditions, change all of the batteries.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
Note
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.
Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into
contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment
thoroughly before installing new batteries.
Connection GuideAM loop antenna
(Australia model)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada and
China models)
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Remote control
GETTING STARTED
Checking the Package Contents
Check your package to make sure it has the following items.
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
6CH INPUT
GND
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
SPEAKERS
TUNER
75Ω UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
P
R
/ C
R
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV / LD
MAIN
REAR
CENTER
CENTER
REAR
P
B
/ C
B
Y
R
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVD
D-TV
CD
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
VCR 2
/DVR
VCR 1
IN
MAIN
SURROUND
/LD
CD
CBL
/SAT
(SURROUND)
COAXIAL
+
+
–
+
+
–
–
–
A
B
SUB
WOOFER
LR
AUDIO OUT S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
O
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
L R
S
V
S
V
DVD Player Main Speaker
TV Subwoofer Center Speaker Rear Center
Speaker
Rear Speaker
CONNECTION
GUIDE
This connection guide shows the basic way to connect this unit
to a DVD player to enjoy 5.1 channel digital sources.
Carefully connect the speakers with
this unit not to cause short circuits.
Tightly twist the exposed wires of
the cable together to prevent short
circuits.
Connection with a DVD player
L
R
V
S
O
Analog audio signal
Optical digital signal
S video signal
Video signal
Signal flow
V795390
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM3
4
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
AB
DIGITAL
123 4567
8
90 q
w
e
r
t
y
s
a
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
i
o
pu
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When
you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit (see page 8).
4 INPUT MODE
Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,
DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is
connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see
page 27). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is
selected as the input source.
5 INPUT l / h
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
6 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
7 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons on the remote control).
8 SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its
corresponding button is pressed.
9 BASS EXTENSION
Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each
time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass
frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB
(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This
boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.
However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN
SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/
BASS OUT” is set to SWFR.
0 PROCESSOR DIRECT
Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at
each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS,
TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed,
eliminating any alteration of the original signal.
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM4
5
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
q STEREO/EFFECT
Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.
When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are
directed to the main left and right speakers without effect
sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except
for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and
right speakers.
w A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).
e PROGRAM l / h
Selects the DSP program (see page 28).
r PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:)
appears next to the band indication on the front panel
display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon
(:) does not appear.
t PHONES jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.
y VIDEO AUX jacks
Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
u PRESET/TUNING EDIT
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the
colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset
station number and tuning.
This button is also used to exchange the assignment of
two preset stations with each other.
i FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
p TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.
To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so
that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel
display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this
button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up.
a BASS
Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right
main channels.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the low-frequency response.
s TREBLE
Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right
main channels.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the high-frequency response.
Note
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and
right main speakers.
■ Opening and closing the front
panel door
When you are not operating the controls behind the front
panel door, close the door.
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM5
6
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0 +10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
r
t
y
u
i
o
s
d
f
g
h
a
p
q
w
0
e
2
3
4
1
5
7
8
9
6
Remote Control
This section describes the controls and their functions of
the remote control. Make sure that the AMP mode is
selected before starting operation. See “REMOTE
CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 42 to 51 for operating
other components with the remote control.
y
Words and symbols in yellow are to operate this unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
3 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
4 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
5 Å
Switches the control area for the extra component that is
not connected to this unit without changing the input.
6 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
7 Display window
Shows the selected source component that you are
controlling.
8 TV POWER
Turns on and off the power of the TV.
9 Operation Section
Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for
operating your other components.
0 LEVEL
Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets
the level.
q Multi control section
Functions vary depending on your components that are
set up with the manufacturer code.
w TEST
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
e DSP program/Numeric buttons
Select DSP programs for the AMP position or numbers
for the other component positions. (Press a button
repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group.)
r RE-NAME
Used for changing the input source name in the display
window (see page 45).
t CLEAR
Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn
and rename features, and set manufacturer codes (see
page 46).
y LEARN
Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for
programming the functions of other remote controls (see
page 44).
u SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
i 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM6
7
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUX
SILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
STANDBY
/
ON
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
AB
DIGITAL
30° 30°
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
o SELECT k/n
Selects the another component to control independently
from the input that has been selected by pressing an input
selector button.
p AV POWER
Turns on and off the power of the component selected by
the input selector button.
a AMP
Selects AMP or other component selected by the input
selector button.
s VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
d MUTE
Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the
MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level.
f SET MENU
Selects the SET MENU mode.
g ON SCREEN
Displays the input or operation status.
h STEREO/EFFECT
Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.
When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are
directed to the main left and right speakers without effect
sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except
for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and
right speakers.
Using the Remote Control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,
stove or bath;
– dusty places; or
– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM7
8
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
RL
LCR
RC RR
LFE
VIRTUAL
DTS
Neo
MOVIE THEATER
ENTERTAINMENT12
:6
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO
LOGIC
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
MATRIX
DISCRETE
PCM
1
SILENT
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
STEREO
TUNED
MEMORY
P. DIRECT
BASS
MUTE VOLUME
SLEEP
AUTO
D
6.1
/
ES
PRO LOGIC
/
AB
78 q wertyui
123456
90
1 Processor indicators
When any function of DSP, DTS, MTRIX DISCRETE,
VIRTUAL, g, 6.1/ES, and
PRO LOGIC
/
is
activated, its indicator lights up.
2 Input source indicator
Shows the current input source with underneath.
3 AUTO indicator
Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
4 SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
5 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
6 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
7 v indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
8 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
9 SP A B indicator
Lights up according to which set of main speakers is
selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of
speakers are selected.
0 SILENT indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound
effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 30).
q DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up when
the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE
THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is
selected.
w Multi-information display
Shows the current DSP program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
e STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.
r TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.
t MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show a station can be stored.
y BASS indicator
Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on.
u P. DIRECT
Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on.
i Input channel indicator
Indicates the channel components of input signals being
received.
Front Panel Display
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM8
9
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
AC OUTLETS
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
6CH INPUT
GND
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
SPEAKERS
TUNER
75Ω UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
PR/ CR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV / LD
MAIN
REAR
CENTER
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
CENTER
REAR
PB/ CB Y
R
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVD
D-TV
CD
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
VCR 2
/DVR
VCR 1
IN
MAIN
SURROUND
/LD
CD
CBL
/SAT
(SURROUND)
COAXIAL
+
+
–
+
+
–
–
–
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
A
B
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
1
7
8 0 q9
2
3
4
5
6
*1
(U.S.A. model)
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
2 Audio component jacks
See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.
4 SUBWOOFER jacks
See page 18 for connection information.
5 AC power cord
Connect to a power outlet.
6 AC OUTLET(S)
Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V
components (see page 19).
7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
8 6CH INPUT jacks
See page 18 for connection information.
9 Antenna input terminals
See page 36 for connection information.
0 Speaker terminals
See pages 11 and 12 for connection information.
q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your
speaker impedance (see page 36). Set this unit in the
standby mode before you change the setting of this
switch.
< China model only >
FREQUENCY STEP switch
See page 36.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 19.
*1 As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not
connect any equipment to this terminal.
Rear Panel
0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 01.7.9, 11:03 AM9
10
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers to Be Used
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-
field quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right
main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center
and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of
speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system,
the tone of a moving human voice and other types of
sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you
use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers
with the same tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound
plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers
from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are
used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center
speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If
for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker,
you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained
with the full system.
The main speakers should be high-performance models
and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other
speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For
precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the
models of equivalent performance with the main
speakers.
■ Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when
the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.
The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.
PREPARATION
Speaker Placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
■ Main speakers
Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
■ Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front
face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to
the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the
monitor and centrally between the main speakers.
Note
• If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will
be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case,
“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see
page 53 for details).
■ Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position,
facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the
floor.
■ Rear center speaker
Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left
and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor
as the rear speakers.
■ Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall
reflections.
CAUTION
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with a monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
Main
speaker (L)
1.8 m (6 feet)
Rear speaker (L)
Rear center
speaker
Rear speaker (R)
Subwoofer
Main speaker (R)Center speaker
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM10
11
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
12
Connecting the Speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage this unit and/or speakers.
If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers
in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.
■ Speaker cables
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One of the cables is colored or
shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable
together to prevent short circuits.
■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
y
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and China models only)
• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of
the corresponding terminal.
10 mm (3/8”)
■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either
of the MAIN A or B terminals.
■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
3
1
2
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM11
12
SPEAKER SETUP
AC OUTLETS
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
6CH INPUT
GND
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
SPEAKERS
TUNER
75Ω UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
P
R
/ C
R
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV / LD
MAIN
REAR
CENTER
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
CENTER
REAR
P
B
/ C
B
Y
R
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVD
D-TV
CD
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
VCR 2
/DVR
VCR 1
IN
MAIN
SURROUND
/LD
CD
CBL
/SAT
(SURROUND)
COAXIAL
+
+
–
+
+
–
–
–
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
A
B
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
1
4567
23
Subwoofer
system
Rear Center
speaker
Main B speaker
Center
speaker
(U.S.A. model)
Right
Rear speaker
■ SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or
rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The
LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are
assigned to this jack.
Notes
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the
remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 63).
• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from
the SUBWOOFER jack.
Right Left
Main A speaker
Right Left
Left
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the
listening room.
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM12
13
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
AC OUTLETS
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
REAR
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
Switch
position
Left
Right
Speaker
Main
Center
Rear
Center
Rear
Main
Center
Rear
Center
Rear
Impedance level
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.
[Canada model only]
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR
switch
(U.S.A. model)
■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit
may be damaged.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the
standby mode.
Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch
only when this unit is in the standby mode.
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM13
14
CONNECTIONS
Before Connecting Components
CAUTION
Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been
completed.
• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some
components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions
for each component to be connected to this unit.
• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or
changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling
system to all its products.
• After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.
Connecting Video Components
■ About the video jacks
There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video
signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals.
The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
) video signals. The jacks are also separated
into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component
(e.g. Y, C
B
, C
R
/Y, P
B
, P
R
/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.
If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the
S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks
on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
y
• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite
video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite
video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively.
• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according
to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages
58 and 59 for details).
Notes
• Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when
connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
• When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being
connected.
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
These jacks are used to connect any video input source
such as a game console and a camcorder to this unit.
S VIDEO VIDEO
L AUDIO R OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL OUT
S VIDEO OUT
O
V
L
R
S
Game console or camcorder
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO VIDEO
P
R
/ C
R
P
B
/ C
B
Y
VIDEO jack
(composite)
COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks
S VIDEO
jack
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM14
15
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
6CH INPUT
GND
AUDIO
TUNER
75Ω UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
MAIN
MAIN
SUB
WOOFER
R
R
L
L
R
L
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
CD
PHONO
MAIN
SURROUND
CD
+
+
–
–
A
B
COAXIAL
CBL
/SAT
AUDIO VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
P
R
/ C
R
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV / LD
P
B
/ C
B
Y
R
L
IN
OUT
OUT
VCR 2
/DVR
VCR 1
IN
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
DVD
/LD
D-TV
L
R
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
RF
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
RF
INPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
O
O
COMPONENT
INPUT
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
L
R
C
C
*1
L
R
L
R
V
S
S
S VIDEO
INPUT
S
V
V
S
S
V
V
V
S
L
R
L
S
R
V
C
O
(U.S.A. model)
LD player
RF
demodulator
*1 If your LD player has an RF
OUTPUT jack, first connect it to
the RF INPUT on an RF
demodulator and then connect
the RF OUTPUT on an RF
demodulator to the COAXIAL
jack on this unit.
indicates S-video cables
indicates video cables
indicates coaxial cables
indicates optical cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates left analog cables
indicates signal direction
Video monitor
VCR 1 or VCR 2/
DVR (digital
video recorder)
Cable TV or
Satellite tuner
DVD player
TV/digital TV or
LD player
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM15
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting Audio Components
■ Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of
digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital
and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to
both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given
to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital
signals (see page 27 for details).
y
• You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to
your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET
MENU (see pages 58 and 59 for details).
Note
• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.
If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this
standard, this unit may not function properly.
■ Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
■ Connecting a CD player
y
• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a
CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks.
• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and
OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from
the COAXIAL CD jack.
■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape
deck or CD recorder
y
• DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT(REC) are
independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL
OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT(REC) jacks.
• When you connect your recording component to both the
analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given
to the digital signal.
Notes
• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its
power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may
distort the sound from other components.
• When you record from a source component connected to this
unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded
sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this
unit.
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM16
17
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
AUDIO VIDEO
TUNER
75Ω UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
D-TV
/LD
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
P
R
/ C
R
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV / LD
P
B
/ C
B
Y
R
L
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
CD-R
DVD
D-TV
CD
IN
OUT
OUT
VCR 2
/DVR
VCR 1
IN
/LD
CBL
/SAT
COAXIAL
CD
GND
R
IN
(
PLAY
)
AUDIO
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
MAIN
SURROUND
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
6CH INPUT
L
L
R
L
R
O
O
O
OUTPUT
GND
L
R
L R
L R
INPUT OUTPUT INPUTOUTPUT
OUTPUT
O
C
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
R
L
R
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
MAIN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
OUTPUT
L R
L
R
C
O
(U.S.A. model)
indicates coaxial cables
indicates optical cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates left analog cables
indicates signal direction
External decoder
See page 18
Turntable
CD player
CD recorder
MD recorder or
tape deck
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM17
18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting to a Subwoofer
SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system
to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main,
center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they
are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this
jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals
generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also
directed if they are assigned to this jack.
Notes
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by
using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE
LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 63).
• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE
LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output
from the SUBWOOFER jack.
Connecting an External Decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left
and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND
and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from
an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot listen to DSP programs.
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of
“1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except
for 1F MAIN LEVEL).
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM18
19
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the Power Supply Cords
■ Connecting the AC power cord
Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.S.A., Canada and China models ............... 2 OUTLETS
Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
components to this unit. The power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets
will supply power to any connected component whenever
this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) is 80 W.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(China model only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/
220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
(U.S.A. model)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(China model only)
AC OUTLETS
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
M
PEDANCE SELECTOR
S
ET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B:
A+B:
CENTER
4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
REAR CENTER
:
:
:
AC OUTLETS
0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM19
20
CONNECTIONS
Turning on the Power
When all connections are completed, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power of
this unit.
The level of the main volume, and then the current
DSP program name appear on the front panel
display.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Same information as above appears on the video
monitor.
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
1
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
1
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
Remote control
Front panel
0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM20
21
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Selecting the OSD Mode
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Make sure the AMP mode is selected and
press ON SCREEN on the remote control
repeatedly to change the display mode.
The OSD mode changes in the following order: full
display, short display, and display off.
Notes
• If you choose a video input source that has a component
connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN
jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO
OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is
output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks.
However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no
video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video
and composite video signals.
• If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to
connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see
the OSD.
• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or
video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.
P01 CONCERT HALL
ROOM SIZE…………1.O
LIVENESS…………………5
INIT.DLY…………45ms
P01 CONCERT HALL
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMEN T
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
678
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)
You can display the operation information for this unit on
a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP
program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier
to see the available options and parameters than it is by
reading this information on the front panel display.
y
• If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is
superimposed over the image.
• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will
not be recorded with any video signal.
• You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when
a video source is not being reproduced (or the source
component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the
SET MENU (see page 62).
OSD Modes
You can change the amount of information the OSD
shows.
Full display
This mode always shows the DSP program parameter
settings on the video monitor (see page 66).
Short display
This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front
panel display at the bottom of the screen and then
disappears.
Display off
This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at
the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards,
no changes to operations appear on the monitor except
those of the ON SCREEN button.
Full display Short display
y
• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h,
VOLUME and some other types of operation information are
displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that
for the front panel display.
• The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the
OSD mode.
0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM21
22
Item
1A CENTER SP
1B MAIN SP
1C REAR L/R SP
1D REAR CT SP
1E LFE/BASS OUT
1F MAIN LEVEL
Description
Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is
being used and its performance.
Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main
speakers.
Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers
are being used and their performance.
Selects the Rear Center channel output according to the size of the Rear
Center speaker.
Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass
signal.
Selects the main speaker level.
Control value (default
setting indicated in bold)
LRG/SML/NONE
LARGE/SMALL
LRG/SML/NONE
LRG/SML/NONE
SWFR/MAIN/BOTH
Normal/–10 dB
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS
This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your
configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings
as well as other possible settings.
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F
If the initial settings shown in the above table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration,
change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from page 53 to 56.
0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM22
23
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY
SUR.)
Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 6
speakers required for a surround sound system. The
adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at
your listening position with the remote control. After
completing the adjustments, use VOL +/– at your
listening position to check if the adjustments are
satisfactory.
1 Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
AMP appears in the display
window on the remote control.
2 Press TEST to output the test tone.
3 Adjust the volume of this unit so you can
hear the test tone.
This section explains how to adjust the speaker output
levels by using the test tone generator. When this
adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening
position will be the same from each speaker. This is
important for the best performance of the digital sound
field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital,
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic
, DTS, DTS ES, and
DTS Neo: 6).
Note
• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from
the PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Before You Begin
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of the
main speakers, press both A
and B.
3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the
front panel to the center position and turn off
BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR
DIRECT by pressing the buttons.
“BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear
on the front panel display.
TEST
RETURN
AMP
BASS
–
+
TREBLE
–
+
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
SELECT
+
+
+
–
–
–
2,5
1
3
4
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
SPEAKERS
AB
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
Set to OFF.
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
3
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
2
33
VOL
+
–
VOLUME
Remote controlFront panel
or
0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM23
24
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
4 Adjust the output level of
the effect speakers using
j / i so the output level
coming from the effect
speakers is the same as
that of the main speakers.
While adjusting, the test tone
is heard from the selected
speaker.
Note
• The output level of the main speakers cannot be adjusted here.
5 When the adjustment is
complete, press TEST to
stop the test tone.
Notes
• The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using
“5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 57).
• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
center channel sound is automatically output from the left and
right main speakers.
• If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be
adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated in the order
of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→LEFT..., skipping the rear right
and left speakers and the rear center speaker.
• If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 4.
The test tone will be circulated in the order of
LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT
SURROUND→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker.
y
• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as
long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening
to or watching the input source with the desired volume by
adjusting the volume key.
• You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers
(center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the
output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main
speakers even after you have increased the output level of these
speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET
MENU to –10 dB (see page 56). This setting decreases the
main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal
level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET
MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear
speakers again.
The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,
center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker,
rear center and left rear speaker in order. The tone is
produced for 2.5 seconds each time.
The state of the test tone output is also shown on the
monitor by an image of the audio listening room.
This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.
Front panel display also indicates from which
speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST
LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→
TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR.
Note
• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this
unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.
LEFT
TEST DOLBY SUR.
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND
CENTER
REAR CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
TEST
RETURN
0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM24
25
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of
main speakers, press both A
and B. The speaker indicator(s)
for the selected set(s) lights up
on the front panel display.
4 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the
input selector buttons on the remote control)
to select the input source.
• The current input source name lights up on the
front panel display.
• The current input source name and input mode
appear on the front panel display and on the video
monitor for a few seconds.
To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks
Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the
front panel display and on the video monitor.
Notes
• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on
the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector
buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the
front panel display and the video monitor.
• If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press 6CH INPUT.
INPUT
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
1
4
6
7
4
PHONO
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
A
DVD AUTO
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
1
6
464
36
7
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
SPEAKERS
AB
or
or
Remote control
Remote control
Front panel
Front panel
Selected input source
6CH INPUT
6CH INPUT
Remote controlFront panel
or
0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM25
26
BASIC PLAYBACK
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the
component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS
EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective
for sound from the main speakers.
Note
• If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR
OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the
reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be
lowered for the characteristics of AV receivers. In this case,
turn on the component.
7 Select a DSP program if desired.
Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on
the remote control) to select a DSP program. See
pages 28 to 35 for details about the DSP program.
PHONO
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
VOL
+
–
VOLUME
BASS
–
+
TREBLE
–
+
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
Front panel
or
Remote control
■ BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to combine a video image
from a video source with a sound from an audio source.
For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music
while having beautiful scenery from the video source on
the video monitor.
Select a source from the video group and then select a
source from the audio group with the input selector
buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV
cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel.
■ To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the
remote control.
To resume the audio output,
press MUTE again.
y
• You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as
VOL +/–.
• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front
panel display and “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel
display for a few seconds.
■ When you have finished using
this unit
Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the
remote control) to set this unit in the
standby mode.
PROGRAM
or
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
Front panel Remote control
STANDBY
/ON
or
STANDBY
Front panel
Remote control
MUTE
0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM26
27
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
Input Modes and Indications
This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the
priority of the input signal among different types of input
signals.
When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode
is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU
(see page 59 for details).
Press INPUT MODE (the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control)
repeatedly until the desired input mode is
shown on the front panel display and on the
video monitor.
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is
automatically selected in the following
order:
1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal
2) Digital (PCM) signal
3) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal
encoded with DTS is selected even if
another signal is input at the same time.
ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is
selected even if a digital signal is input at
the same time.
Notes
• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack
has precedence over the OPTICAL jack.
• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
setting and reproduces 6.1 channel source.
• In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on
some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a
moment when playback resumes after a search because the
digital signal is selected again.
• When playing the LD source that has not been digitally
recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In
this case, set the input mode to ANALOG.
INPUT MODE
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
A
DVD AUTO
PHONO
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
Remote controlFront panel
or
Input mode
■ Notes on the digital signal
The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle
96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a
source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and
set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation
instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-
kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
– DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output
as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and
right main speakers.
Note
• If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1E LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the
subwoofer.
–“Adjusting the output level of the effect speakers”
described on page 63 cannot be made.
■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs
• If the digital output data of the player has been
processed in any way, you may not be able to perform
DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection
between this unit and the player.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and
set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces
the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you
want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the
source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to
AUTO or DTS.
• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit
reproduces no sound.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with
the input mode set to AUTO;
– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-
decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.)
after having detected the DTS signal. When playback
of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator
may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS
source can be played. If you want to play a normal
PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.
– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or
skip operation is performed while the DTS source is
playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If
this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this
unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”
mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”
indicator will turn off.
0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM27
28
BASIC PLAYBACK
Selecting a Sound Field Program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. There are 10 programs with sub-programs
available with this unit. However the selection depends on
the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are
possible for all input signal formats. For details about
each program, see pages 31 to 35.
1 Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the numeric
buttons on the remote control) to select the
desired program.
The name of the selected program appears on the
front panel display and on the video monitor.
AMP
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
2
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
2,3
1
3 After selecting the desired program, press
the same button repeatedly to select the
desired sub-program if available.
For example, to select the sub-program “70 mm
Spectacle”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly.
Notes
• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and
not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening
room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections
in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically
selected when you turn on the power again.
• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode
is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 8–10) automatically
switches to the appropriate decoding program.
• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Moive, or
Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers
and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center
speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is
set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main
speakers.
• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit
is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the
DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is
reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.
LR
MOVIE THEATER
1
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
PRO LOGIC
/
A
70mm Spectacle
PROGRAM
Sub-program name
Program name
Front panel
or
Remote control
LR
MOVIE THEATER
1
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
PRO LOGIC
/
A
DGTL Spectacle
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
Program name
Sub-program name
0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM28
29
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
(For remote control only)
3 Press the numeric button 11 repeatedly to
select the decoder; PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC
or Neo: 6.
The decoder selection switches from PRO LOGIC
to Neo: 6 and then returns to PRO LOGIC on the
front panel display.
4 After deciding on the decoder (PRO LOGIC
or Neo: 6), select the mode to suit the
source by pressing the numeric button 10.
The selection switches as follow;
PRO LOGIC
Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music
(when PRO LOGIC
is selected)
Neo: 6 Cinema ↔ Neo: 6 Music
(when Neo: 6 is selected)
Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6
You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or
six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC
or Neo:
6 in the program No. 10.
1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback
on the source component.
2 Select PRO LOGIC (Movie/Music) or Neo: 6
(Cinema/Music) by pressing PROGRAM l /
h on the front panel.
Select PRO LOGIC by pressing the numeric
button 10 on the remote control.
LR
PRO
LOGIC
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
PRO LOGIC
/
A
PRO LOGIC
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
Remote control
or
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
2
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
2,3,4
PROGRAM
Front control
0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM29
30
BASIC PLAYBACK
■ Playing the Dolby Digital Matrix
6.1 or DTS ES software
Press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or
DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1
and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker.
The display changes AUTO → Disc6.1 → Mtrx6.1 →
OFF each time the ES/6.1 button is pressed.
Notes
• No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you
have set “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE.
• The rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-
channel source also.
AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby
Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS
ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in
the input source that this unit can detect.
Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1
channel sources.
Disc6.1: This mode can be selected only when the
source with DTS ES Discrete format has
been detected.
Mtrx6.1: This mode makes 6-channel playback of the
input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder.
OFF: Rear center speaker does not work in this
mode.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT
CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP
With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the
DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual
speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP
program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET
MENU to NONE.
Note
• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:
– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic
, DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is selected;
– when the sound effect is turned off;
– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
– when using the test tone; or
– when connecting the headphones.
6.1/ES
CHP/INDEX
12
The “ c ” indicator lights up.
STEREO
EFFECT
STEREO
EFFECT
Front panel
or
Remote control
RL
LCR
RC RR
MOVIE THEATER
1
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
D
6.1
/
ES
A
Spectacle 6.1
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
SILENT CINEMA DSP
You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were
actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can
listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your
headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound
field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the
headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the
front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to
the source with normal stereo reproduction.)
Note
• This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if
the sound effect is on;
– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.
■ Normal Stereo Reproduction
Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect
for normal stereo reproduction.
Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back
on.
Notes
• If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the
center speaker, rear speakers, rear center speaker and
subwoofer.
• If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is
automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear
speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.
• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the
sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU
to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.
■ Displaying the information about
the input source
You can display the information such as the type, format
and sampling frequency of the signal input from the
component connected to this unit.
1 Select the input source you want to obtain
the information about by pressing an input
selector button.
2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode.
3 Press STEREO to light STEREO.
4 Press d to display the information about the
input signal.
0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM30
BASIC
OPERATION
31
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)
Understanding Sound Fields
A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a
particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear
early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound
produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and
other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives
each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.
YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to
measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music
venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the
direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then
we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this
unit.
■ Recreating a sound field
Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your
listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound
field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.
The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the
virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener.
Hi-Fi DSP Programs
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Program
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
ENTERTAINMENT/
Disco
ENTERTAINMENT/
6ch Stereo
Features
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions
emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual
seat is near the center, close to the stage.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns
along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than
with other sound field programs.
This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The
floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound.
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at
LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The
sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate”
sound.
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for
background music at parties.
0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM31
32
CINEMA-DSP
Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP
Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread
even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with
the images on the screen.
CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP
integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field
programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In
CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and
Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,
and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.
When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the
most suitable sound field program for that signal.
L SURROUND SOUND FIELD
R SURROUND SOUND FIELD
PRESENCE SOUND FIELD
DIALOG
EFFECT MUSIC
In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with various precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6
decoder for 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or
DTS ES decoder for a rear center channel. You can select the CINEMA-DSP program to optimize these decoders and
the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.
0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM32
33
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without
using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound
localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality
sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a
dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or
DTS technology.
■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect
These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing
on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,
left surround and right surround channels. This processing
enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field
and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-
equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear
separation of all channels.
■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect
These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center
DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added.
■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect
Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and
surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround
matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks.
These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed
to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of
sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding
processes.
■ Dolby Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6
Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five
discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 or 3 channels in rear). They also provide two modes; MOVIE/
CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel source.
Surround DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM33
34
CINEMA-DSP
CINEMA-DSP Programs
■ For moive programs: No. 8 to 10
According to the input signal format, this unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field
pattern.
Table of Program Names for Each Input Format
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DTS DIGITAL
SUR
PRO LOGIC
PRO LOGIC
DTS Neo: 6
2 channel
Stereo
70 mm Spectacle
70 mm Sci-Fi
70 mm Adventure
70 mm General
—
—
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
Movie
Music
Cinema
Music
DOLBY DIGITAL
DGTL Spectacle
DGTL Sci-Fi
DGTL Adventure
DGTL General
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5.1 channel
DTS
DTS Spectacle
DTS Sci-Fi
DTS Adventure
DTS General
—
—
Normal
Enhanced
—
—
—
—
—
—
DTS ES
Spectacle ES
Sci-Fi ES
Adventure ES
General ES
—
—
ES Matrix 6.1
ES Discrete 6.1
*
2
Enhanced ES
—
—
—
—
—
—
6.1 channel *
1
Input
Program
DOLBY DIGITAL
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*1 means the 6.1 /ES Matrix decoder is ON.
*2 means the DTS ES software encoded with Discrete 6.1 is input.
y
• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically
switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the 6.1/ES button on the
remote control, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will
be selected.
• 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the
program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.
• When playing 6.1 channel source with 6.1/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for
5.1 channel.
Note
• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 10 except for the Enhanced mode.
No.
8
9
10
0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM34
35
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
Program
Enhanced Mode
No.
5
6
7
Program
ENTERTAINMENT/
Game
TV SPORTS
MONO MOVIE
Features
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows,
music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is
oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the
surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence
sound field.
■ For audio-video sources in 2-channel: No. 5 to 7
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.
Note
• Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.
No.
8
9
10
Features
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It
precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of
science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the
silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm
and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the
newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as
much as possible.
This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,
and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is
relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the
echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.
This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film
theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital
sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound
orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from
the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
General
0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:11 PM35
36
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and
GND terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the beat
reception.
y
• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and
attached to a wall, etc.
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer
reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the
quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA
dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.
TUNING
Connecting the Antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal
strength.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.
■ Connecting the indoor FM
antenna
Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω
UNBAL. FM ANT terminal.
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR/ CR
DVD
M
ONITOR
OUT
D-TV / LD
PB/ CB Y
75Ω UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
TUNER
FREQUENCY STEP switch (China model only)
Because the interstation frequency spacing
differs in different areas, set the
FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on
the rear panel) according to the frequency
spacing in your area.
North, Central and South America:
100 kHz/10 kHz
Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect the
AC power plug of this unit from the AC
outlet.
1
2
3
100kHz/10kHz
FREQUENCY
STEP
50kHz/9kHz
FM AM
(U.S.A. model)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM
antenna
(included)
AM loop antenna
(included)
0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM36
37
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l
to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button
again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired
station.
When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown on the front panel display.
y
• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not
stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune in to it manually.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 described in
“Automatic tuning” on left.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from
the front panel display.
If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display
next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING
EDIT to turn it off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue the tuning search.
Note
• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change
the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.
Automatic and Manual Tuning
There are 2 ways of tuning; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
When using the remote control to proceed some of the
steps in “TUNING”, make sure the “TUNER” mode is
selected.
■ Automatic tuning
1 Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display
next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING
EDIT to turn it off.
INPUT
PRESET/
TUNING
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
4
3
32
1
FM/AM
or
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
or
Front panel
Remote control
V
CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1
SP
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
D
A
A AM 1404
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Goes off
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
PRESET/
TUNING
V
CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1
SP
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
D
A
A AM 1404
V
CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1
SP
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
D
A
A AM 1404
0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM37
38
TUNING
Presetting Stations
■ Automatically presetting stations
(for FM stations)
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those
stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in
to any preset station by selecting the preset station
number (see page 40).
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”
indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds,
automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency
currently displayed toward the higher frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
MEMORY
MUTE VOLUME
SLEEP
AUTO
D
A
A1:FM
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
1
23
Lights up
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• When a station data is stored under a preset number, the
frequency and reception band are also stored.
• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or
AM station by simply following the procedure in the section
“Manually presetting stations” on page 39.
• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually
in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure
in “Manually presetting stations” on page 39.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit
will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h (A/B/
C/D/E and PRESET j / i on the remote control) to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2. Press PRESET/TUNING EDIT to turn off the colon (:)
and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning
toward lower frequencies.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
FM/AM
0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM38
39
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
■ Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5
groups) manually.
1 Tune in to a station.
See page 37 for tuning instructions.
When tuned in to a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of received station.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about
5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote
control) repeatedly to select a preset station
group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator
is flashing.
The group letter appears and make sure that the
colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to
the band indication.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
MEMORY
MUTE VOLUME
SLEEP
D
A
C :AM 576 kHz
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
43 2,5
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
Flashes
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i
on the remote control) to select a preset
station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY”
indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is
flashing.
The station band and frequency
appear on the front panel
display with the preset group
and number you have selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
MUTE VOLUME
SLEEP
D
A
A AM 576 kHz
or
Remote control
Front panel
PRESET/
TUNING
Front panel
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
VOLUME
D
A
C3:AM 576 kHz
or
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
VOLUME
D
A
C3:AM 576 kHz
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
ON SCREEN
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
TITLE
+
+
–
–
Remote control
0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM39
40
TUNING
Exchanging Preset Stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING. (A/B/C/E/D
and PRESET j / i on the remote control)
See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on left.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING EDIT for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING. (A/B/C/E/D
and PRESET j / i on the remote control)
“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the
front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING EDIT again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Tuning in to a Preset Station
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote
control) to select the preset station group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i
on the remote control) to select a preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
PRESET/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
MEMORY
MUTE VOLUME
SLEEP
D
A
A5:FM 90.6 MHz
VCR DVD TUNER CDCD RV AUX 1
SP
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
MEMORY
D
A
EDIT E1-A5
Shows the exchange of stations has
been completed.
Front panel
Remote control
or
Front panel
Remote control
or
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
2
1
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
1
2
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
2,41,31,3
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
1,3
1,3
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD R1
SP
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
MEMORY
MUTE
SLEEP
D
A
E1:FM 87.50 MHz
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD R1
SP
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
TUNED
MEMORY
MUTE
SLEEP
D
A
E1:FM 87.50 MHz
0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM40
41
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
INPUT
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
2
BASS
VOLUMEINPUT
INPUT M0DE
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PROGRAM
STEREO
SPEAKERS
BASS
EXTENSION
PROCESSOR
DIRECT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
EFFECT
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
TUNER
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
DSP
6CH INPUT
– +
TREBLE
– +
PRO LOGIC
AB
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/
ON
2
PHONO
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
Front panel Remote control
or
BASIC RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for these components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected component.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Notes
• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,
VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP
programs does not affect the recorded material.
• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal by your VCR.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material
may infringe copyright laws.
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
■ Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your
player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its
operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog
signal will be output from the player.
■ Timer playback/recording
This unit can perform playback or recording with an
external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation
instruction for the component and the timer to be used.
Notes
• The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the
playback or recording with the timer.
• If you do not want any sound output during the recording with
a timer, turn the volume down.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so
on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if
the timer is turned off for more than one week, the
stored data will be lost.
0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM41
42
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To
control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes.
This remote control also has a sophisticated Learn feature. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the
remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote
control receiver. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment
room.
Notes
• For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7.
• For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7.
Control Area
■ Control area of this unit
The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown
below. You can use the functions within this area no
matter which component control area is selected when the
AMP mode is selected.
■ Control area for each component
The component control area is the shaded area shown
below. Each component has different functions for the
operation buttons in the component control area. The
component which has been chosen by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k/n can be controlled and the
display window shows the corresponding name of the
component to be operated.
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
VOL
STEREO
EFFECT
MUTE
AMP
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
–
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
POWER
AVTV
+
+
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
POWER
AVTV
+
+
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
Å button and input selector
buttons switch the control area
for each component.
* Å button is to operate the
other component that is not
connected to this unit.
Factory setting is YAMAHA LD
player.
Component control area
There are 12 component control areas. You can set up the
manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in
each area. See pages 47 to 51.
Å button and
input selector
buttons
SELECT k/n switch the control
area for another component
independently from the input
selected by an input selector
button.
The display window will show
one of the following:
(when pressing n, in the reverse
order when pressing k) A,
PHONO, TUNER, CD, V-AUX,
CBSAT, MD, CD-R, TV-LD,
VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD.
The buttons in the
dotted lines
(SYSTEM POWER,
STANDBY, SLEEP,
6CH INPUT, VOL +/
–, MUTE and
STEREO) function in
any mode.
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM42
43
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
3 Press u / d to select the name of your
component’s manufacturer.
You will find the names of most worldwide audio-
video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the
display window.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press j / i. You can set a different
component from the input selector name.
Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE,
TUNER, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR
Note
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes,
try each of them until you find the correct one as checking if it
works following step 4.
4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
check if it works for the component being
set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting
has been correctly made.
y
• If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3
and 4.
5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
Notes
• If you have already programmed a remote control function for
a button, the function by learning programming takes priority
over the setup manufacturer code’s function.
•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing
buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one
button at once.
Setting the Manufacturer Code
You can control other components by setting a
manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each
component control area.
The following table shows factory-set component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each area.
1 Press an input selector button or Å to select
the component you want to set up.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
Notes
• Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning
process is started.
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3,
the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from
step 2.
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
LEARN
Input area
A
PHONO
TUNER
CD
V-AUX
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
D-TV/LD
VCR 1
VCR 2/DVR
DVD
Component category
(Library)
LD
TV
TUNER
CD
VCR
CABLE
MD
CD-R
TV
VCR
VCR
DVD
Manufacturer
YAMAHA
–
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
–
–
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
–
–
–
YAMAHA
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
TV VOL
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
+
+
–
LEARN
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM43
44
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
4 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” is displayed.
5 Press and hold the button on the other
remote control that has the function you
want to program into this remote control
until “OK” appears in the display window.
Notes
•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has
not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 4.
• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.
However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In
this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make
further learning on the remote control.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional
functions.
7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning
mode.
Notes
• Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough
power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have
enough power to transmit signals to this remote control.
• When the remote controls are either too close together or too
far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control.
• Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays.
•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing more
than one button at once.
Programming a New Remote
Control Function (Learn Feature)
If you want to program functions not included in the basic
operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a
manufacturer code is not available, the following
procedure needs to be performed. The possible
programming area is the same as a component control
area, so the buttons are programmable independently for
each source component area.
Note
• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn
most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you
may not be able to program some special signals or extremely
long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the
other remote control.)
1 Press an input selector button or Å to select
a source component.
2 Place this remote control and the other
remote control 1 to 4 cm apart on a flat
surface so that their infrared transmitters are
aimed at each other.
3 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three
seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer
code setting mode.
Note
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5
and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start
over from step 4.
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
AUDIO
VOL
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
–
1 to 4 cm (approximately 1 inch)
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
LEARN
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
LEARN
Flashes alternately
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM44
45
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
One Button Clear
You can clear the function learned in a certain
programmable button in each area.
1 Press an input selector button or Å to select
the source component you want to do “One
Button Clear”.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
3 Press the button that you want to clear for 3
seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
4 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning
mode.
Changing the Source Name in the
Display Window
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use the
different name from the original input selector button
names. This is useful when different component is set in
the input selector button.
1 Press an input selector button or Å to select
the source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press RE-NAME by using
a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
3 Press u / d to select and enter a character.
Pressing d changes the character in the following
order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and /
(slash). (Pressing u goes in the reverse order.)
4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next
position.
Repeat step 3 and 4 until the new name is completed.
y
• If you continuously want to rename another source component,
press SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.
5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the
renaming mode.
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
RE-NAME
LEARN
LEARN
CLEAR
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
RE-NAME
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM45
46
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
Clearing Learned Functions,
Renamed Source Names, and
Setup Manufacturer Codes
1 Press an input selector button or Å to select
the area for which you want to clear the
name, function or manufacturer code.
2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
Note
• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2
and 3, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over
from step 1.
3 Press u / d to select the clear mode.
The mode is shown in the display window in the
following order:
4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
Note
•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.
Once you have cleared a learned function or macro
for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.
Note
•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing
buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one
button at once.
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
(L: name of a component) Clears
all learned functions for the
component area.
Clears all learned functions for
this unit control area.
Clears all learned functions.
Clears all renamed source names
in the display window.
Clears all programmed functions
including setup manufacturer
codes. This returns to the factory
settings.
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM46
47
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Each Component Control Area
The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component
you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button or Å, or SELECT k / n to select a
component you want to control.
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR
2/DVR areas)
■ Operating a DVD player (DVD
area)
Pause
*
Skip backward
Search backward
Stop
Title
RETURN
Numeric buttons
DISC SKIP
Power
AUDIO
Skip forward
Search forward
MENU
Up/down, left/
right and SELECT
DISPLAY
Title/index
VCR Channel
up/down
Pause
Record
*
Play
Search backward
Power
Search forward
Stop
Play
Numeric buttons
Enter
*
* TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV
without switching the input if the manufacturer code is
set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer
code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and
PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-
TV/LD area.
* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV volume +/–, and TV
MUTE function to operate your TV without switching
the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD
or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV
is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas,
priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM47
48
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD
area)
■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/
LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV
(CBL/SAT area)
Play
TV MUTE
POWER
(Pause)
(Record)
Play
(Search backward)
TV INPUT
Channel up/down
(Power)
(Search forward)
Volume up/down
Pause
Skip backward
Search backward
Numeric buttons
Stop
Power
Sound
Skip forward
Search forward
Display
Chapter/time
Numeric buttons
Enter/12
*
*
Set the manufacture code for your LD player following
the setting procedure described on page 43 because TV is
factory-set for this input selector button.
* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume
+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV
without switching the input if the manufacturer code is
set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer
code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and
PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-
TV/LD area.
The buttons in parentheses above (AV POWER, REC, d,
w, t/y, a) function to operate your VCR without
switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is
set in VCR 1.
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM48
49
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0 +10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
■ Operating a CD player (CD area)
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R
area) or an MD recorder (MD/
TAPE area)
Numeric buttons
Pause
DISC SKIP
Skip backward
Search backward
Power
Skip forward
Play
Search forward
Display
Index
Record (MD
recorder only)
Skip backward
Search backward
Numeric buttons
Power
Pause
Skip forward
Play
Stop
Search forward
Display
Index
*
*
*
*
* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume
+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV
without switching the input if the manufacturer code is
set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer
code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and
PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-
TV/LD area.
* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume
+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV
without switching the input if the manufacturer code is
set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer
code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and
PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-
TV/LD area.
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM49
50
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area)■ Operating an tape deck (MD/TAPE
area)
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
Pause
Record
Direction A
Search backward
Power
A/B
Direction B
Play
Stop
Preset down Preset up
Power
A/B/C/D/E
Preset stations
*
*
*
Search forward
Numeric buttons
Index
* TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume
+/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV
without switching the input if the manufacturer code is
set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer
code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and
PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-
TV/LD area.
* TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV
without switching the input if the manufacturer code is
set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer
code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and
PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-
TV/LD area.
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM50
51
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
■ Operating the component set in Å
This button is not an input selector button but simply
provides the space for an extra component to control with
this unit’s remote control without making connection to
this unit. The shaded area shown below can be used for
the component set in
Å
and the function for each button
differs depending on the component.
YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in
Å
. However if you
want to set other component, set the manufacturer code
for the component you want to set in the
Å
button
following the manufacturer code setting procedure
described on page 43.
TV POWER functions to
turn on and off your TV
without switching the
input if the manufacturer
code is set in D-TV/LD
or PHONO. When the
manufacturer code for
your TV is set up in the
both D-TV/LD and
PHONO areas, priority is
given to the signal in the
D-TV/LD area.
The functions of these
buttons in the component
control area differ for the
component you set in Å.
0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM51
52
Adjusting the Items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.
1 Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to
14) you want to adjust.
y
• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the
same order as when pressing d.
4 Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of
the selected item.
The last setting you adjusted appears on the video
monitor or on the front panel display.
AMP
SET MENU
ADVANCED OPERATION
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0 +10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
2
4,5
3,6
1
The SET MENU consists of 14 items including the
speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and
parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate
item and adjust or select the values as necessary.
y
• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
• We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU
while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video
monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit
while adjusting the items.
Note
• The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of
the OSD.
1 SPEAKER SET
1A CENTER SP
1B MAIN SP
1C REAR L/R SP
1D REAR CT SP
1E LFE/BASS OUT
1F MAIN LEVEL
2 LOW FRQ TEST
3 L/R BALANCE
4 HP TONE CTRL
5 CENTER GEQ
6 INPUT RENAME
7 I/O ASSIGNMENT
7A CMPNT-V INPUT
7B OPTICAL OUT
7C OPTICAL IN
7D COAXIAL IN
8 INPUT MODE
9 PARAM. INI
10 LFE LEVEL
11 DYNAMIC RANGE
12 SP DELAY TIME
13 DISPLAY SET
14 MEMORY GUARD
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
≥ TEST TONE………OFF
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
SET MENU 1/4
2 LOW FRQ TEST
3 L/R BALANCE
4HPTONECTRL
/ : Up/Down
-/+ : Enter
≥ 1 SPEAKER SET
SET MENU 1/4
≥ 2 LOW FRQ TEST
3 L/R BALANCE
4 HP TONE CTRL
/ : Up/Down
-/+ : Enter
1 SPEAKER SET
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM52
53
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub
item.
5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting
of the item.
6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu
disappears or simply press one of the DSP
program group button to exit from the SET
MENU.
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
2 LOW FRQ TEST
≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
TEST TONE………OFF
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
≥ TEST TONE…………ON
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
LRG SML NONE
1A CENTER SP
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
LRG SML NONE
1A CENTER SP
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,
level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those
in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected.
• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.
■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker
mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
this unit can provide good dialog localization for many
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and
images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center
speaker depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E
LFE/BASS OUT”.
or
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from
the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than
one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM53
54
SET MENU
LRG SML NONE
1A CENTER SP
LARGE SMALL
1B MAIN SP
LRG SML NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG SML NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG SML NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LARGE SMALL
1B MAIN SP
NONE
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signal are directed to the left and right
main speakers.
■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)
The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending
on how you set this item.
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
Initial setting: LARGE
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire
range of the left and right main channel signal is directed
to the left and right main speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS
OUT”.
Note
• When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are
directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the
main speaker mode.
■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker
mode)
The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers
depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or
if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the
left and right rear speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.
The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E
LFE/BASS OUT”.
NONE
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting
NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”.
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM54
55
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center
speaker mode)
By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker
configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-
to-back and transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The
entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to
the rear center speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The
low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
center channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“1E LFE/BASS OUT”.
NONE
Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of
the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and
right rear speakers.
■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out
mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-
frequency signals are directed to both main right and left
speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for
both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
Initial setting: BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals
are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix
the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE
signals.
Note
• The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main,
center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE
channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A,
1B, 1C and 1D.
SWFR MAIN BOTH
1E LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR MAIN BOTH
1E LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR MAIN BOTH
1E LFE/BASS OUT
LRG SML NONE
1D REAR CT SP
LRG SML NONE
1D REAR CT SP
LRG SML NONE
1D REAR CT SP
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM55
56
SET MENU
Normal -10dB
1F MAIN LEVEL
Normal -10dB
1F MAIN LEVEL
2 LOW FRQ TEST
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your
configuration. Change the setting with the remote control
while sitting in the listening position.
1 Press j / i to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and
adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you
can hear the tone.
Notes
• Do not turn up the volume too high.
• If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in
the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections
are correct.
2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i
to select the speaker you want to compare
with the subwoofer.
If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will
not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will
not necessarily be output from the selected speakers.
The output mode of the test tone depends on the
settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU.
3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to
select the frequency you want to use.
■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level
mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level
of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the
main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency
performance of the main speakers.
Choices: Normal, –10 dB
Initial setting: Normal
Normal
Select this if you can match the output level of your effect
speakers with that of your main speakers when using the
test tone.
–10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when
using the test tone.
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
≥ TEST TONE…………ON
2 LOW FRQ TEST
≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
FRQ……………………88Hz
TEST TONE………OFF
2 LOW FRQ TEST
OUTPUT…MAIN L/R
≥ FRQ……………………88Hz
TEST TONE………OFF
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM56
57
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
5 CENTER GEQ
≥ 300Hz
1kHz
3kHz
10kHz
-+
+3dB
100Hz
4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone
control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL
(treble)
Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)
5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic
equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic
equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches
that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the
100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.
Control range (dB): –6 to +6
Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band
1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u
to select a lower frequency.
2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that
frequency.
y
• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this
item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the
foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the
video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the
speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains
at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes
as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone,
press TEST (see pages 23 and 24).
3 L/R BALANCE
0
-/+ : Adjust
/ : Exit
L
…………………… ……………………
R
4 HP TONE CTRL
TRBL
-
+
0dB
≥BASS
5 CENTER GEQ
300Hz
1kHz
3kHz
10kHz
-+
0dB
≥ 100Hz
4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the
controls on the subwoofer so it matches that
of the speaker you are comparing it to.
■ About the test tone
The test tone is produced by the tone generator.
The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise
centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter.
You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through
250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps.
You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the
subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency
characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency
sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position,
speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other
conditions.
Digital generator
(wide band noise produced)
Band pass filter
35 Hz – 250 HzCenter freq.
Freq.
Noise
3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the
left and right main speakers)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level
from the left and right main speakers.
Control range: 10 steps for L/R
Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R
Press i to decrease the output level for the
left main speaker. Press j for the right main
speaker.
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM57
58
SET MENU
6 INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input which
appears on the OSD or the front panel display.
1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT
l / h) to select the input you want to
change the name of.
2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
3 Press u/d to select the character you want
to use and j / i to move to the next one.
• Press d to change the character in the following
order, or press u to go in the reverse order.
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,
*, +, and so on.
• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other
inputs.
Note
• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.
4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT
RENAME.
6 INPUT RENAME
-/+ : Position
/ : Character
DVD ≥ DVD
6 INPUT RENAME
-/+ : Position
/ : Character
DVD ≥ DVD1
6 INPUT RENAME
-/+ : Position
/ : Character
DVD ≥ DVD
7A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B]……………D-TV/LD
≥ [A]…………… DVD
7B OPTICAL OUT
(2)…………… CD-R
≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE
7 I/O ASSIGNMENT
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component
to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack
or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component
names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes
it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively
connect more component.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks
[A] and [B]
Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD
[B] D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/
DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT
Initial settings: [A] DVD
[B] D-TV/LD
■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL
OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2)
Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO,
V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/
SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD
(2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/
DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD,
DVD, MD/TAPE
Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE
(2) CD-R
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM58
59
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
8 INPUT MODE (initial input
mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn
on this unit (see page 27 for details about the input
mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Initial setting: AUTO
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for that source.
■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL
INPUT jacks (3) to (6)
Choices: (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/
TAPE, CD-R
(4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR,
VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,
MD/TAPE
(5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD,
PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/
SAT, D-TV/LD
(6) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R,
CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT
Initial settings: (3) CD
(4) CD-R
(5) DVD
(6) D-TV/LD
■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL
INPUT jacks (7) and (8)
Choices: (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR,
VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,
MD/TAPE, CD-R
(8) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/
TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONE, V-AUX,
VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1
Initial settings: (7) CD
(8) CBL/SAT
Note
• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
7D COAXIAL IN
≥ (8)………CBL/SAT
(7)…………… CD
8 INPUT MODE
-/+ : Select
/ : Exit
AUTO LAST
7C OPTICAL IN
(4)…………… CD-R
≥ (5)…………… DVD
(6)……………D-TV/LD
(3)…………… CD
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM59
60
SET MENU
9 PARAM. INI (parameter
initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP
program within a DSP program group. When you
initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter
values within that group revert to their initial settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for
the DSP program that you want to initialize.
The asterisk (*) next to the program number means
that the parameter values have been changed.
Notes
• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a
group separately.
• The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if
you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk
mark (*).
• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 62),
you cannot initialize any program groups.
• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot
automatically revert to the previous parameter settings.
10 LFE LEVEL
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes
Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the
low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to
certain scenes.
Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and
HEADPHONE
Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and
HEADPHONE
1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted.
2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.
Note
• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones.
9 PARAM. INI
* 5 678
9 *10
Press No. Key
1 23*4
10 LFE LEVEL
HEADPHONE…………0dB
≥ SPEAKER………………0dB
10 LFE LEVEL
HEADPHONE…………0dB
≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM60
61
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
L
C
C
RC
R
RL
RR
RC
12 SP DELAY TIME
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the
Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this
unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the
Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the
same distance from the main listening position as the left
and right Main speakers. However, in most home
situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker
is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear
speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker
and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from
the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the
main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem
the same as the distance between the left and right Main
speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the
listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center
speaker is especially important for giving depth to the
dialogue.
Control range: 0 to 5 ms for CENTER
0 to 30 ms for REAR CENTER
Initial setting: 0 ms for CENTER
3 ms for REAR CENTER
Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay
of the center and the rear center channel
sounds.
Center speaker image
y
• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position.
11 D-RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting
is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital
signals.
MAX
Select the “MAX” setting for feature films.
STD
Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use.
MIN
Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at
extremely low volume levels.
11 D-RANGE
HP: MAX STD MIN
≥ SP: MAX STD MIN
12 SP DELAY TIME
REAR CNTR…………3ms
≥ CENTER…………………0ms
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM61
62
SET MENU
13 DISPLAY SET
■ BLUE BACK
Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays
a blue background when there’s no video signal input.
Nothing is displayed on the screen including the on-
screen display if OFF is selected.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
Initial setting: AUTO
■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)
This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the
OSD.
Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
Initial setting: 0
Press i to lower the position of the OSD.
Press j to raise the position of the OSD.
■ DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
14 MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other settings on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Initial setting: OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
• DSP program parameters
• All SET MENU items
• Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels
• The on-screen display (OSD) mode
Notes
• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use
the test tone.
• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select
any other SET MENU items.
13 DISPLAY SET
OSD SHIFT………………0
DIMMER………………………0
≥ BLUE BACK………AUTO
14 MEMORY GUARD
-/+ : Select
/ : Exit
OFF ON
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM62
63
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker
(center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening
to a music source.
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker
changes and appears on the front panel display and
on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear,
rear center, left rear and subwoofer.
TV INPUT
LEVEL
TITLE
AMP
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
2
2
3
1
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV INPUT
LEVEL
TITLE
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS
y
• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to
be adjusted by pressing d / u.
Center speaker output level
Subwoofer output level
Left rear speaker output
level
Rear center speaker output
level
Right rear speaker output
level
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
• The control range for the center or left and right
rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB
to –20 dB.
Notes
• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and
“1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS
OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be
adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers.
• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you
made with the test tone will be changed.
• It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a
subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test
Tone on pages 23 and 24.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from
the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than
one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the
output level again.
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM63
64
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The
sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer
also automatically turns off the external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S).
The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.
y
• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you
can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions
of the timer.
Setting the Sleep Timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly
to set the amount of time
before this unit
automatically turns off.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
SLEEP
SLEEP
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
1
2
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
SLEEP
D
A
SLEEP 120min
LR
VCR DVD TUNER CD
PHONO
CD RV AUX
DSP
1
SP
DIGITAL
VCR2/DVR
CBL
/
SAT
MD
/
TAPE
TV
/
LD
VOLUME
SLEEP
D
A
CONCERT HALL
SLEEP TIMER
3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the
front panel display after the sleep timer has
been set.
The display then returns to the previous indication.
Canceling the Sleep Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the
“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns
to the previous indication.
y
• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit
in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control
(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the
AC power cord from the AC outlet.
0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM64
65
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
What is a sound field?
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,
there are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly
(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting
from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or
a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as
shown in the diagram on page 70 for any particular
environment, and provide vital information to our ears.
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of
a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
Sound Field Program Parameters
DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine
the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from
you to the performer, etc. In each program, these
parameters are set with values precisely calculated by
YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.
It is recommended to use DSP programs without
changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also
allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with
one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those
parameters.
Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you
to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment
to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters
correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create
the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or
other listening environment. The size of the room, for
example, affects the length of time between the early
reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in
many of the DSP programs alters the timing between
these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”
you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of
the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a
significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb
sound, for example, cause the reflections and
reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly
reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a
longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters
allow you to control these and many other factors that
contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to
essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.
provided to create custom-tailored listening environments
that ideally match your mood and music.
See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on
pages 67 to 70.
0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM65
66
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
4 Press u / d to select the
parameter.
5 Press j / i to change the
parameter value.
y
• When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-
set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name
on the video monitor.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to
change other program parameters.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter value you edited will
return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter
value again.
Resetting a Parameter to the
Factory-set Value
■ To reset some of the parameters
to the factory-set values
Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and
hold j / i until the value temporarily stops at the factory-
set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name
disappears on the video monitor.
■ To reset all of the parameters to
the factory-set values
Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of
the parameter values of all DSP programs within the
selected group to the factory-set values (see page 60).
This operation resets all of the parameter values of all
DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values.
Notes
• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,
press u / d.
• You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY
GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to
change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to
OFF (see page 62).
Changing Parameter Settings
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set
parameters. Although you do not have to change the
initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
Adjustments should be made with the remote control.
y
• We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a
video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to
see the front panel display.
1 Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
2 Turn on the video monitor
and press ON SCREEN
repeatedly to select the
full display mode.
3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.
AMP
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
P04 ROCK CONCERT
ROOM SIZE…………1.0
LIVENESS…………………5
REV.TIME…………1.6s
REV.DELAY……120ms
REV.LEVEL……………7%
≥ INIT.DLY…………15ms
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0 +10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
CHP/INDEX
CHURCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
Program No.
Example of the parameter setting display
Parameters
Cursor
Program name
PHONO
POWER SLEEP
CLEAR
LEARN
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
A
D
-
TV/LD
POWER
REC
POWER
AMP
AVTV
VCR2/DVRVCR 1 DVD
SELECT
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
TUNER CD
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
TV INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
MENU
STEREO
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
6.1/ES
0
+
10
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
TEST
ON SCREEN
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
RETURN
DISPLAY
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHURCH
CHCH
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK
CONCERT
TITLE
MUTE
+
+
+
–
–
–
3421
5
910
11 12
67 8
2
4
5
3
1
Parameter valves
0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM66
67
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Large value = 2.0Small value = 0.1
Sound Source
TimeTimeTime
Early
Reflections
Sound Source
Level
Level
Level
■ ROOM SIZE
[P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Control Range 0.1 – 2.0
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Large value = 99 msSmall value = 1 ms
Reflection Face
Sound Source
TimeTime Time
INIT.DLYINIT.DLYINIT.DLY
Early
Reflections
Sound Source
Level
Level
Level
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)
[P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Control Range 1 – 99 msec
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the
direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a
large room, it would be set to a large value.
0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM67
68
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Large value = 10Small value = 0
Large
Reflected Sound
Small Reflected
Sound
Sound Source
Live
TimeTimeTime
Dead
Sound Source
Level
Level
Level
■ LIVENESS Control Range 0 – 10
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range
depends on the signal format.)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound.
■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side
of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear
channels are used.
■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Control Range 0 –10
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
■ RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center
sound field.
■ RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.
■ RC. LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Control Range 0 – 10
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.
0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM68
69
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGDIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Time
REV. LEVEL
Sound Source
■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Time
REV. TIMEREV.
DELAY
Reverberation
Sound Source
Level
■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) Control Range 0 – 250 msec
Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Large value = 5.0 sSmall value = 1.0 s
Long
Reverberation
Short
Reverberation
Sound Source
REV. TIMEREV. TIMEREV. TIME
Early Reflections
ReverberationSound SourceReverberation
■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec
Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to
decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range.
Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time
for “live” sources and listening room environments.
0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM69
70
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
For 6ch Stereo
■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
For PRO LOGIC Music
■ PANORAMA Control Range OFF/ON
Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.
■ DIMENSION Control Range –3 – STD – +3
Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.
■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Control Range 0 – 7
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM70
71
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact
the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
On-screen display
does not appear.
No sound and/or no
picture.
The picture does not
appear.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Cause
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
on the rear panel is not fully set to the
left or right position.
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
The setting for the on-screen display is
set to “DISPLAY OFF”.
The BLUE BACK setting under “9
DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is
set to OFF, and no video signal is input
to this unit.
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
The speaker connections are not secure.
The main speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Digital signals other than PCM audio,
Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this
unit cannot reproduce are being input to
this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc.
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
The sleep timer has functioned.
The sound is muted.
Remedy
Firmly connect the power cord.
Set the switch fully to the left or right position when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
Select the full display or short display mode.
Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the
OSD.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l /
h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).
Secure the connections.
Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
Turn up the volume.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
Make connections using the same type of jack
(between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components)
for both the input and output.
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set
to the appropriate position and then turn this unit
back on.
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Refer
to page
19
19
12, 13
21
62
11 – 17
25
12, 13
25
26
26
—
14, 15
13
12, 13
64
26
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM71
72
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
No sound from the
center speaker.
No sound from the
rear speakers.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
Poor bass
reproduction.
No sound from the
rear center speaker.
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Cause
Incorrect cable connections.
Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE”
on the SET MENU.
The sound effect is off.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS decoding DSP program is being
used with material not encoded with
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is
being input to this unit.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is
set to NONE.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 7)
has been selected.
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal does not have a center
channel signal.
The output level of the rear speakers is
set to minimum.
A monaural source is being played with
the program 10.
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET
MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is being played.
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET
MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a
2-channel source is being played.
The source does not contain low bass
signals (90 Hz and below).
“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET
MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and
your system does not include a
subwoofer.
The output mode for each speaker (main,
center, rear, or rear center) on the SET
MENU does not match your speaker
configuration.
“1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU
is set to NONE.
6.1/ES is not on.
Incorrect cable connections.
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Remedy
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Adjust it to the appropriate position.
Press STEREO to turn it on.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
Select another DSP program.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
Select BOTH.
Select MAIN.
Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker
based on the size of the speakers in your
configuration.
Select LRG or SML.
Press the 6.1/ES button on the remote control to turn
it on.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
Refer
to page
12, 13
57
30
28 – 35
27
63
53
31 – 35
—
63
31 – 35
55
55
—
55
53 – 56
55
30
11 – 17
16, 17
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM72
73
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The volume level is low
while playing a record.
The volume level
cannot be increased, or
the sound is distorted.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
of this unit.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears on the front
panel display.
The sound is degraded
when listening with
headphones connected
to a tape deck or CD
player that is connected
to this unit.
There is noise
interference from digital
or high-frequency
equipment, or this unit.
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
Cause
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The component connected to the REC
OUT jacks of this unit is turned off.
It is not possible to record the sound
effect by a recording component.
A source component is only connected to
the analog input jacks of this unit.
“14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET
MENU is set to ON.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Speaker cables are short circuited.
This unit is in the standby mode.
This unit is too close to the digital or
high-frequency equipment.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Remedy
The turntable should be connected to this unit
through an MC-head amplifier.
Turn on the power to the component.
Connect the source component to the digital
input jacks of this unit.
Select OFF.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected
correctly.
Turn on the power of this unit.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it
back on.
Refer
to page
16, 17
16
41
11 – 17
62
—
12, 13
—
—
—
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM73
74
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
Problem
FM
AM
Cause
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
There is multipath interference.
The station is too weak.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Remedy
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Re-store the stations.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
Move this unit away from the TV.
Refer
to page
36, 37
36
36, 37
38
36, 37
36
—
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM74
75
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
Continuous functions
such as volume
adjustment are learned,
but operate only for a
moment before
stopping.
Cause
Wrong distance or angle.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
The batteries are weak.
The internal microcomputer has
“frozen”.
The batteries of this remote control and/
or the other remote control are too weak.
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Memory capacity is full.
The internal microcomputer has
“frozen”.
The learning process is incomplete.
Remedy
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Reposition this unit.
Replace all batteries with new ones and press
RESET.
Remove the batteries from the battery
compartment once and then put them back.
Replace the batteries.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
Learning is not possible.
Further learning is not possible without deleting
unnecessary functions.
Remove the batteries from the battery
compartment once and then put them back.
Be sure to press and hold the function button on
the other remote control until “OK” appears in
the display window.
Refer to
page
7
—
3
3
3
44
44
45, 46
3
44
After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if
you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode,
disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM75
76
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording
system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:
two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel
for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that
gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.
With three front channels (left, center and right), and two
rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-
range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency
effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel).
Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and
the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with previously
unheard of excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode
vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This
new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback
with two left and right main channels, a center channel,
and two left and right rear channels compared with one
limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic
technology. Also the music mode is available for 2-
channel sources in addition to the movie mode.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial
representation of DTS digital surround in your home.
This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel
sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two
rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer,
for a total of 5.1 channels).
■ Neo: 6
Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1 channel systems.
■ CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and
designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and
so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are
differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth
of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM76
77
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
GLOSSARY
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any rear speakers by using
virtual rear speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a
minimum two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
■ S VIDEO signal
With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B
/C
B
and P
R
/C
R
signals for the chrominance. Color can
be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in
order to use the component signal for output.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number
of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ I/O assignment (SET MENU)
Although component is normally connected according to
jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a
function that assigns jacks according to the component
being connected. If the component being used differs
from the component name shown for this unit’s
component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks,
it is possible to assign jacks according to the component
being connected. This makes it possible to change the
jack assignment and effectively connect more component.
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.6, 6:12 PM77
78
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 80 W
• DIN Standard Output Power
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 145 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China model]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 125 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 105/130/170/200 W
• Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more
• Frequency Response
CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.04%
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted)
[U.S.A., Canada and China models] ................................. 86 dB
[Other models] ................................................................... 81 dB
CD (200 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................... 98 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB
• Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz
• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity
CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ
PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ
6CH INPUT .................................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 kΩ
• Output Level
REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/0.9 kΩ
PRE OUT .................................................................. 2.6 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL
• Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• S-Video Signal Level
Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Component Video Signal Level
Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)
• Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB
• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz
[China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 260 W
[Canada model] ...................................................... 270 W/370 VA
[Other models] ..................................................................... 360 W
Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.5 W
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................. 2 (Total 80 W maximum)
[China model] ........................................ 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Australia model] .......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)
• Dimension (W x H x D)
............................ 435 x 171 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17”)
• Weight ......................................................................... 15 kg (33 lbs)
• Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control
....................................................................................... Batteries
......................................................................... AM loop antenna
...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna
........................................................................ Connection Guide
*Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 01.7.9, 11:05 AM78
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
V795350
OWNER’S MANUAL
HTR-5490
U
AV Receiver
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the
space below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
0100HTR5490(U)-cv1/4 01.7.18, 9:33 AM1
Documenttranscriptie
U HTR-5490 AV Receiver IMPORTANT YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100HTR5490(U)-cv1/4 1 OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia V795350 01.7.18, 9:33 AM Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • 11 Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 12 13 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lighting – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, I CAUTION 0101HTR5490_Cau_EN(U) 2 01.7.6, 6:11 PM SAFETY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. 2. 3. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. CAUTION II 0101HTR5490_Cau_EN(U) 3 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, and 20 cm on the right and left, and at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 4 5 6 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Buring objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China model only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. III CAUTION 0101HTR5490_Cau_EN(U) 4 01.7.6, 6:11 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION CONTENTS ....................................................... 1 FEATURES ........................................................ 2 GETTING STARTED ....................................... 3 Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP .......................................... 10 CONNECTIONS ............................................. 14 Before Connecting Components ............................ 14 Connecting Video Components .............................. 14 Connecting Audio Components ............................. 16 Connecting to a Subwoofer .................................... 18 Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19 Turning on the Power ............................................. 20 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ..................... 21 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ..................... 22 Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F ... 22 SET MENU ...................................................... 52 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 52 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 53 2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 56 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ............................................................. 57 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 57 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 57 6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 58 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 58 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 59 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 60 10 LFE LEVEL ..................................................... 60 11 DYNAMIC RANGE ......................................... 61 12 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 61 13 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 62 14 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 62 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS .................................................. 63 SLEEP TIMER ................................................ 64 ADVANCED OPERATION OSD Modes ............................................................ 21 Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 21 Control Area ........................................................... 42 Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 43 Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) ................................................... 44 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window .. 45 One Button Clear .................................................... 45 Clearing Learned Functions, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes ............. 46 Each Component Control Area .............................. 47 BASIC OPERATION Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 10 Speaker Placement ................................................. 10 Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 11 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .............. 42 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 6 Using the Remote Control ........................................ 7 Front Panel Display .................................................. 8 Rear Panel ................................................................ 9 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 64 Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 64 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ....................................................... 23 Before You Begin ................................................... 23 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 23 BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................ 25 Input Modes and Indications .................................. 27 Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28 Selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ....................... 29 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ............................................................ 31 Understanding Sound Fields .................................. 31 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 31 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ..................................................... 65 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION What is a sound field? ............................................ 65 Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 65 Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 66 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 66 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ......................................... 67 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. 71 GLOSSARY ..................................................... 76 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 78 CINEMA-DSP ................................................. 32 Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP ............................ 32 CINEMA-DSP Programs ....................................... 34 TUNING ........................................................... 36 English Connecting the Antennas ........................................ 36 Automatic and Manual Tuning ............................... 37 Presetting Stations .................................................. 38 Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 40 Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 40 BASIC RECORDING ..................................... 41 1 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 1 01.7.6, 6:42 PM FEATURES Built-in 6-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Main: 80 W + 80 W Center: 80 W Rear: 80 W + 80 W Rear center: 80 W ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 14 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes and “Learning” Capability ◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the original signal Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo: 6 Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 2 01.7.9, 4:50 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Remote control TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna Connection Guide LEARN DVD Player AUDIO OUT OPTICAL CONNECTION GUIDE SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT L L O PHONO TUNER Carefully connect the speakers with this unit not to cause short circuits. CD-R VCR2/DVR DVD AUDIO L R R VIDEO S VIDEO L DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y VIDEO DVD IN (PLAY) D-TV / LD OUT (REC) SUB WOOFER D-TV /LD MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R CD-R OUT (REC) TUNER IN VCR 1 AM ANT R MAIN GND D-TV PHONO /LD R L + REAR (SURROUND) B CENTER – 75Ω UNBAL. OUT MAIN A – IN VCR 2 /DVR CD L + OUT DVD CD Tightly twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. FM ANT – CBL /SAT SURROUND – REAR CENTER + + COAXIAL MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS CENTER DIGITAL INPUT L GND SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO 6CH INPUT Analog audio signal V R POWER TV AV Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada and China models) AMP REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP S video signal S SELECT POWER S Optical digital signal O V S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN Video signal COMPONENT VIDEO IN Signal flow TV Subwoofer RIGHT LEFT Center Speaker Rear Center Speaker Rear Speaker V795390 (Australia model) VOL – LEVEL TITLE CH – MUTE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB BASIC OPERAIONT TEST STEREO EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 PREPARATION MD/TAPE VCR 1 LEFT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT V AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL MD/ TAPE CBL/SAT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT S This connection guide shows the basic way to connect this unit to a DVD player to enjoy 5.1 channel digital sources. V-AUX S VIDEO OUT R CD D-TV/LD Main Speaker VIDEO OUT RIGHT Connection with a DVD player A S VIDEO OUT R AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT /DTS SUR. SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. ■ Notes on batteries • Change the batteries periodically. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. ADVANCED OPERATION Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ■ Changing batteries 1 3 APPENDIX If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. Note Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. English 1 3 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 3 01.7.6, 6:11 PM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 7 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E SPEAKERS A B PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES STEREO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX + – + PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EDIT 8 9 0 q w e r ty u MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO i op a s 1 STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 8). 4 INPUT MODE Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see page 27). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 7 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 8 SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its corresponding button is pressed. 9 BASS EXTENSION Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/ BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 0 PROCESSOR DIRECT Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. 4 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 4 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS q STEREO/EFFECT w A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). e PROGRAM l / h Selects the DSP program (see page 28). Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears next to the band indication on the front panel display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. a BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. s TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. Note t PHONES jack y VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you are not operating the controls behind the front panel door, close the door. ADVANCED OPERATION u PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset station number and tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. BASIC OPERAIONT Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. PREPARATION r PRESET/TUNING l / h p TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up. INTRODUCTION Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. D I G I TA L i FM/AM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Switches the reception band between FM and AM. o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. APPENDIX English 5 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 5 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the controls and their functions of the remote control. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 42 to 51 for operating other components with the remote control. 1 POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT r t y u A PHONO TUNER CD i V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 2 TRANSMIT 3 SYSTEM RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN 4 5 6 7 8 SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP AUDIO DISC SKIP + o p a s – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL f CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + g PRESET TEST w d A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT q MUTE MENU ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB STEREO h EFFECT e ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 6 /DTS SUR. 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX 5 Å Switches the control area for the extra component that is not connected to this unit without changing the input. 6 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. 7 Display window Shows the selected source component that you are controlling. 9 Operation Section Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating your other components. 0 LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. q Multi control section Functions vary depending on your components that are set up with the manufacturer code. VOL 0 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 8 TV POWER Turns on and off the power of the TV. REC 9 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. w TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. e DSP program/Numeric buttons Select DSP programs for the AMP position or numbers for the other component positions. (Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group.) r RE-NAME Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 45). t CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, and set manufacturer codes (see page 46). y LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming the functions of other remote controls (see page 44). y Words and symbols in yellow are to operate this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. u SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. i 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 6 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 6 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the Remote Control p AV POWER Turns on and off the power of the component selected by the input selector button. INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER INTRODUCTION o SELECT k/n Selects the another component to control independently from the input that has been selected by pressing an input selector button. 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP a AMP Selects AMP or other component selected by the input selector button. EFFECT SILENT 30° VIDEO AUX – + – + 30° Approximately 6 m (20 feet) PREPARATION s VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. d MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. g ON SCREEN Displays the input or operation status. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. ADVANCED OPERATION h STEREO/EFFECT Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and right speakers. BASIC OPERAIONT f SET MENU Selects the SET MENU mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 7 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 7 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 1 V AUX DSP 6.1/ES 2 VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT MATRIX VIRTUAL DISCRETE DIGITAL SILENT PRO LOGIC / PCM SP AB 7 8 90 D TV/LD DVD 3 MD/TAPE CD R DTS Neo:6 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC MOVIE THEATER 12 ENTERTAINMENT TUNER 45 CD PHONO STEREO AUTO TUNED MEMORY MUTE SLEEP BASS P. DIRECT 6 VOLUME LFE q w e r t L C R RL RC RR y u i 1 Processor indicators q DSP program indicators When any function of DSP, DTS, MTRIX DISCRETE, PRO LOGIC / is VIRTUAL, g, 6.1/ES, and activated, its indicator lights up. The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. 2 Input source indicator Shows the current input source with underneath. w Multi-information display 3 AUTO indicator Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 4 SLEEP indicator e STEREO indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 5 MUTE indicator r TUNED indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. 6 VOLUME level indicator t MEMORY indicator Indicates the volume level. Flashes to show a station can be stored. 7 v indicator y BASS indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on. 8 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 9 SP A B indicator Lights up according to which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. u P. DIRECT Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on. i Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. 0 SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 30). 8 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 8 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 3 2 AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL MD/ TAPE AUDIO L R VIDEO S VIDEO L R CD 5 4 6 COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y VIDEO DVD DVD IN (PLAY) OUTPUT MD/TAPE CD-R *1 INTRODUCTION 1 D-TV / LD OUT (REC) SUB WOOFER D-TV /LD CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MONITOR OUT AC OUTLETS CD-R CD-R OUT (REC) TUNER IN AM ANT MAIN + OUT DVD CD VCR 2 /DVR CD REAR 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. A+B: 16ΩMIN. : 8ΩMIN. CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. : 8ΩMIN. REAR – /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER 75Ω UNBAL. OUT MAIN MAIN A OR B: A+B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR (SURROUND) – IN L + A GND D-TV PHONO /LD R L PREPARATION VCR 1 R FM ANT – – B CBL /SAT SURROUND + + COAXIAL REAR CENTER CENTER MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS CENTER DIGITAL INPUT GND S VIDEO VIDEO 6CH INPUT 8 9 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 2 Audio component jacks See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. 4 SUBWOOFER jacks See page 18 for connection information. 5 AC power cord q (U.S.A. model) 9 Antenna input terminals See page 36 for connection information. 0 Speaker terminals See pages 11 and 12 for connection information. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Video component jacks 0 BASIC OPERAIONT 7 SUB WOOFER q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance (see page 36). Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch. Connect to a power outlet. Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 19). FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 36. 7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 19. 8 6CH INPUT jacks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION < China model only > 6 AC OUTLET(S) See page 18 for connection information. APPENDIX *1 As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. English 9 0102HTR5490_1-9_EN(UA) 9 01.7.9, 11:03 AM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 6-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Center speaker Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case, “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see page 53 for details). ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Rear center speaker Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with a monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. 10 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 10 01.7.6, 6:11 PM SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the Speakers CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 2 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals 2 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Banana plug Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 1 2 BASIC OPERATION 1 1 PREPARATION If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. INTRODUCTION Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. y ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and China models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. APPENDIX ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. ■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals English A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 11 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 11 01.7.6, 6:11 PM SPEAKER SETUP Main B speaker Right Main A speaker Left Right 1 AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R MD/ TAPE R VIDEO S VIDEO L CD 2 3 COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y VIDEO DVD DVD IN (PLAY) OUTPUT MD/TAPE CD-R Subwoofer system Left D-TV / LD OUT (REC) SUB WOOFER D-TV /LD SET BEFORE POWER ON CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MONITOR OUT AC OUTLETS CD-R CD-R OUT (REC) TUNER IN VCR 1 AM ANT R MAIN VCR 2 /DVR CD REAR 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B: 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR – 75Ω UNBAL. OUT MAIN MAIN A OR B: A+B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR (SURROUND) – IN L + A GND D-TV PHONO /LD R + OUT DVD CD L FM ANT – – B CBL /SAT SURROUND + + COAXIAL REAR CENTER CENTER MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS CENTER DIGITAL INPUT GND SUB WOOFER VIDEO S VIDEO 6CH INPUT (U.S.A. model) 4 5 Center speaker 6 Rear Center speaker 7 Right Left Rear speaker ■ SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 63). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 4 1 3 2 6 5 7 The diagram above shows the speaker layout in the listening room. 12 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 12 01.7.6, 6:11 PM SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Select the left and right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON Switch position Speaker Main MAIN A OR B: A+B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER Left /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON AC OUTLETS If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Main MAIN A OR B: 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. [Canada model only] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Right Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Rear (U.S.A. model) ADVANCED OPERATION MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B: 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. BASIC OPERATION MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. A+B: 16ΩMIN. : 8ΩMIN. CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. : 8ΩMIN. REAR Impedance level PREPARATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch INTRODUCTION WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. APPENDIX English 13 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 13 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO P R/ C R P B/ C B Y VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO jack COMPONENT jack (composite) VIDEO jacks y • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 58 and 59 for details). Notes • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO L AUDIO R VIDEO These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console and a camcorder to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT Game console or camcorder S VIDEO OUT 14 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 14 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONNECTIONS RF OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT COMPONENT OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT TV/digital TV or LD player S VIDEO OUTPUT V S VIDEO OUTPUT L AUDIO L R S VIDEO OUTPUT R VIDEO S VIDEO L R CD-R CD V S VIDEO OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y VIDEO DVD DVD IN (PLAY) MD/TAPE R DVD player PREPARATION AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL MD/ TAPE L COMPONENT OUTPUT INTRODUCTION AUDIO OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT LD player R D-TV / LD OUT (REC) D-TV /LD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT L (U.S.A. model) MAIN MONITOR OUT SUB WOOFER CD-R CD-R OUT (REC) TUNER IN RF INPUT RF demodulator O DVD CD O D-TV PHONO /LD MAIN R + AM ANT OUT A GND – IN VCR 2 /DVR *1 C CD 75Ω UNBAL. OUT MAIN FM ANT – B CBL /SAT SURROUND C L BASIC OPERATION VCR 1 + COAXIAL MONITOR OUT CENTER DIGITAL INPUT GND SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO 6CH INPUT ADVANCED OPERATION L R S S VIDEO OUTPUT L L R S S Cable TV or Satellite tuner indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables V indicates video cables VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video recorder) AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT *1 If your LD player has an RF S OUTPUT jack, first connect it to V the RF INPUT on an RF demodulator and then connect VIDEO S VIDEO the RF OUTPUT on an RF INPUT INPUT demodulator to the COAXIAL jack on this unit. APPENDIX L S VIDEO OUTPUT V V S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO OUTPUT COAXIAL OUTPUT COMPONENT INPUT indicates S-video cables Video monitor 15 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 15 01.7.6, 6:11 PM English S R ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AUDIO OUTPUT V CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals (see page 27 for details). y • You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see pages 58 and 59 for details). Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks. • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape deck or CD recorder y • DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT(REC) are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT(REC) jacks. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • When you record from a source component connected to this unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this unit. y • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 16 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 16 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONNECTIONS OPTICAL INPUT OPTICAL INPUT INPUT OUTPUT R L L OUTPUT R R L R VIDEO S VIDEO L R L O COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y VIDEO DVD DVD IN (PLAY) MD/TAPE OPTICAL OUTPUT R PREPARATION MD/ TAPE AUDIO AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL INPUT L O O OPTICAL OUTPUT CD recorder INTRODUCTION MD recorder or tape deck D-TV / LD CD-R OUT (REC) D-TV /LD CD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT MONITOR OUT CD-R OUTPUT CD-R OUT (REC) CD player TUNER IN L VCR 1 O OUT DVD CD R AM ANT D-TV PHONO /LD IN VCR 2 /DVR C CD COAXIAL OUTPUT BASIC OPERATION GND 75Ω UNBAL. OUT MAIN FM ANT CBL /SAT SURROUND COAXIAL MONITOR OUT (U.S.A. model) CENTER DIGITAL INPUT GND GND OUTPUT S VIDEO VIDEO 6CH INPUT L R R CENTER OUTPUT L R MAIN OUTPUT External decoder See page 18 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SUBWOOFER OUTPUT SURROUND OUTPUT Turntable indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L ADVANCED OPERATION L SUB WOOFER English 17 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 17 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting to a Subwoofer OUTPUT SUB WOOFER SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Connecting an External Decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except for 1F MAIN LEVEL). Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 63). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 18 0103HTR5490_10-18_EN(UA) 18 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the Power Supply Cords Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) SET BEFORE POWER ON AC OUTLETS MAIN A OR B: A+B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B: 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR BASIC OPERAIONT (U.S.A. model) ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China model only) VOLTAGE SELECTOR ADVANCED OPERATION The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. VOLTAGE SELECTOR PREPARATION U.S.A., Canada and China models ............... 2 OUTLETS Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 80 W. MPEDANCE SELECTOR INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting the AC power cord IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON AC OUTLETS 4ΩMIN. 8ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. 6ΩMIN. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAIN A OR B: A+B: : CENTER REAR CENTER : : REAR /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B: 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR APPENDIX (China model only) English 19 0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 19 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CONNECTIONS Turning on the Power When all connections are completed, turn on the power of this unit. 1 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT TRANSMIT VIDEO AUX RE–NAME CLEAR – + – + LEARN SYSTEM 1 POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC 1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Remote control Front panel The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Same information as above appears on the video monitor. 20 0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 20 01.7.6, 6:11 PM ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) y 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Make sure the AMP mode is selected and press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AMP AV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + PREPARATION • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU (see page 62). Selecting the OSD Mode INTRODUCTION You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. VOL – OSD Modes LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT CH – MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET ON SCREEN CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 EFFECT Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor (see page 66). Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. 6 /DTS SUR. 7 SELECT DISPLAY 8 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Notes • If you choose a video input source that has a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. INIT.DLY…………45ms ROOM SIZE…………1.O LIVENESS…………………5 P01 CONCERT HALL Full display ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P01 CONCERT HALL 9 ADVANCED OPERATION Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 BASIC OPERAIONT You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Short display y APPENDIX • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. English 21 0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 21 01.7.6, 6:11 PM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F Item Description Control value (default setting indicated in bold) 1A CENTER SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1B MAIN SP Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main speakers. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers are being used and their performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1D REAR CT SP Selects the Rear Center channel output according to the size of the Rear Center speaker. LRG/SML/NONE 1E LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass signal. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH 1F MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level. Normal/–10 dB If the initial settings shown in the above table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from page 53 to 56. 22 0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 22 01.7.6, 6:11 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 6 speakers required for a surround sound system. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. After completing the adjustments, use VOL +/– at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory. 3 Before You Begin INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT PREPARATION Note Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) INTRODUCTION This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic , DTS, DTS ES, and DTS Neo: 6). D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE D I G I TA L SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TREBLE TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON EFFECT SILENT SPEAKERS A BASS TUNING MODE BASIC OPERAIONT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT B A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE – VIDEO AUX + – + TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX – – + + SELECT 3 POWER TV AV AMP AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – 1 2 + – SET MENU + 4 2,5 CH A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT – MUTE MENU TV VOL + PRESET PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. AMP appears in the display window on the remote control. 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. AMP TEST RETURN 3 Adjust the volume of this unit so you can hear the test tone. APPENDIX – BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT TREBLE TITLE TV INPUT SPEAKERS A B Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and turn off BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR DIRECT by pressing the buttons. “BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear on the front panel display. BASS LEVEL 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. 1 REC ADVANCED OPERATION 2 3 POWER VOLUME + + Set to OFF. or VOL – Remote control English Front panel 23 0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 23 01.7.6, 6:11 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS LEFT RIGHT 4 CENTER Adjust the output level of the effect speakers using j / i so the output level coming from the effect speakers is the same as that of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. + TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – Note LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND • The output level of the main speakers cannot be adjusted here. 5 REAR CENTER The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker, rear center and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. LEFT Front panel display also indicates from which speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→ TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR. Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. When the adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. Notes • The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using “5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 57). • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→LEFT..., skipping the rear right and left speakers and the rear center speaker. • If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the out level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT SURROUND→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker. y • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source with the desired volume by adjusting the volume key. • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 56). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. 24 0104HTR5490_19-24_EN(UA) 24 TEST RETURN 01.7.6, 6:11 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 4 6 4 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX + – + 4 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. • The current input source name lights up on the front panel display. • The current input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION A V-AUX INPUT 4 1 6 7 3 6 TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP LEARN 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD REC AUDIO 4 or SYSTEM POWER DISC SKIP + Front panel 6 Remote control VOL – TITLE SELECT POWER POWER TV AV TV VOL A/B/C/D/E CH CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET V AUX VCR2/DVR + VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE DVD SP A PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL REC MUTE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME MENU TV INPUT – AMP SET MENU + RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB AUTO L R STEREO EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Selected input source 7 STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT SYSTEM POWER or or Front panel Front panel Remote control ADVANCED OPERATION Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. BASIC OPERATION LEVEL 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Remote control 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. The speaker indicator(s) for the selected set(s) lights up on the front panel display. SPEAKERS A B Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. APPENDIX Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 English 25 0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 25 01.7.6, 6:11 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 5 6 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Adjust the volume to the desired output level. If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. VOLUME ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel. + or A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD VOL – Front panel BASS – Remote control TREBLE + – ■ To mute the sound BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT Note • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered for the characteristics of AV receivers. In this case, turn on the component. 7 Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 28 to 35 for details about the DSP program. PROGRAM or HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX y • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOL +/–. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display and “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel display for a few seconds. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON Front panel or Remote control Front panel 26 0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) MUTE Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. + 26 01.7.6, 6:11 PM Remote control BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on the digital signal Input Modes and Indications When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 59 for details). INPUT MODE A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD – “Adjusting the output level of the effect speakers” described on page 63 cannot be made. ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs or V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT Remote control D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO AUTO VOLUME L R AUTO: Notes English 27 0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 27 APPENDIX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack has precedence over the OPTICAL jack. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 6.1 channel source. • In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing the LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. ADVANCED OPERATION Input mode • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed while the DTS source is playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC OPERATION Front panel Note • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the priority of the input signal among different types of input signals. The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. 01.7.6, 6:11 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a Sound Field Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. There are 10 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However the selection depends on the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are possible for all input signal formats. For details about each program, see pages 31 to 35. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. For example, to select the sub-program “70 mm Spectacle”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 INPUT 6 /DTS SUR. 6CH INPUT 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER ROCK CONCERT HALL D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING BASS TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY TREBLE Program name TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX + – + V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD + DISC SKIP VOL – LEVEL SELECT TV VOL TV INPUT AV MENU A/B/C/D/E CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – AMP MUTE SET MENU + TITLE TV + PRESET PRESET TEST STEREO ON SCREEN TV VOL REC RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX 2,3 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the numeric buttons on the remote control) to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. AMP HALL PROGRAM or CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 9 Front panel SP A VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP CBL/SAT SP A /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Remote control D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME DGTL Spectacle L R Sub-program name 28 0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) CD PHONO VOLUME L R • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 8–10) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Moive, or Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. MOVIE THEATER 1 PRO LOGIC / TUNER 70mm Spectacle Program name V AUX CD R Notes REC AUDIO 1 MD/TAPE Sub-program name SYSTEM POWER DVD LEARN POWER POWER D TV/LD MOVIE THEATER 1 PRO LOGIC / 2 CBL/SAT 28 01.7.6, 6:11 PM BASIC PLAYBACK Selecting PRO LOGIC (For remote control only) or Neo: 6 3 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L Press the numeric button 11 repeatedly to select the decoder; PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6. The decoder selection switches from PRO LOGIC to Neo: 6 and then returns to PRO LOGIC on the front panel display. PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E SPEAKERS A B PRESET /TUNING BASS TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES STEREO ROCK CONCERT HALL INTRODUCTION You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 in the program No. 10. S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 5 OPTICAL PROGRAM 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES DSP MOVIE THEATER 2 EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX + – + 9 4 REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP VOL – LEVEL TITLE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH A/B/C/D/E + STEREO ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB EFFECT ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES 9 CHP/INDEX After deciding on the decoder (PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6), select the mode to suit the source by pressing the numeric button 10. The selection switches as follow; PRO LOGIC Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music (when PRO LOGIC is selected) Neo: 6 Cinema ↔ Neo: 6 Music (when Neo: 6 is selected) PRESET MOVIE THEATER 2 12 +10 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX 2,3,4 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 9 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Select PRO LOGIC (Movie/Music) or Neo: 6 (Cinema/Music) by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. 6 /DTS SUR. 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX ADVANCED OPERATION 1 ROCK CONCERT HALL MOVIE THEATER 2 BASIC OPERATION PRESET TEST 11 0 CH TV MUTE SELECT – MUTE SET MENU + 10 PREPARATION 2 /DTS SUR. PROGRAM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front control or Select PRO LOGIC by pressing the numeric button 10 on the remote control. ROCK CONCERT HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 6 /DTS SUR. 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX APPENDIX Remote control V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME PRO LOGIC DSP PRO LOGIC / SP A PRO LOGIC L R English 29 0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 29 01.7.6, 6:11 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Playing the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES software SILENT CINEMA DSP Press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker. 6.1/ES 12 CHP/INDEX You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) Note V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME MOVIE THEATER 1 DIGITAL 6.1/ES SP A Spectacle 6.1 L C R RL RC RR The “ c ” indicator lights up. • This unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if the sound effect is on; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back on. The display changes AUTO → Disc6.1 → Mtrx6.1 → OFF each time the ES/6.1 button is pressed. Notes STEREO • No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you have set “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. • The rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1channel source also. AUTO: Disc6.1: Mtrx6.1: OFF: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the input source that this unit can detect. Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. This mode can be selected only when the source with DTS ES Discrete format has been detected. This mode makes 6-channel playback of the input source through the Matrix 6.1 decoder. Rear center speaker does not work in this mode. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. STEREO or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Notes • If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers, rear center speaker and subwoofer. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. ■ Displaying the information about the input source You can display the information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the component connected to this unit. 1 Select the input source you want to obtain the information about by pressing an input selector button. 2 3 4 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. Press STEREO to light STEREO. Press d to display the information about the input signal. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV VOL – 30 0105HTR5490_25-30_EN(UA) 30 CH + PRESET 01.7.6, 6:11 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) PREPARATION A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. INTRODUCTION Understanding Sound Fields ■ Recreating a sound field BASIC OPERATION Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener. Hi-Fi DSP Programs No. Program ADVANCED OPERATION The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Features A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 CHURCH This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. 3 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 4 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 5 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. APPENDIX CONCERT HALL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 English 31 0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 31 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CINEMA-DSP Sound Design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with various precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6 decoder for 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder for a rear center channel. You can select the CINEMA-DSP program to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. 32 0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 32 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CINEMA-DSP ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field PREPARATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTSequipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field INTRODUCTION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. ■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADVANCED OPERATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added. /DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 or 3 channels in rear). They also provide two modes; MOVIE/ CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel source. APPENDIX English 33 0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 33 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CINEMA-DSP CINEMA-DSP Programs ■ For moive programs: No. 8 to 10 According to the input signal format, this unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern. Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 8 9 10 2 channel 6.1 channel *1 5.1 channel Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DTS ES 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle ES 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi ES 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure ES 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General ES — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 — — — Normal — ES Matrix 6.1 ES Discrete 6.1 *2 — — Enhanced — Enhanced ES Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Cinema — — — — Music — — — — Program MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC DTS Neo: 6 *1 means the 6.1 /ES Matrix decoder is ON. *2 means the DTS ES software encoded with Discrete 6.1 is input. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the 6.1/ES button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be selected. • 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing 6.1 channel source with 6.1/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Note • The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 10 except for the Enhanced mode. 34 0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 34 01.7.6, 6:11 PM CINEMA-DSP The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Note INTRODUCTION • Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. No. 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Enhanced Mode ADVANCED OPERATION This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 10 MOVIE THEATER 1 Features PREPARATION 9 Program ■ For audio-video sources in 2-channel: No. 5 to 7 Program ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No. Features ENTERTAINMENT/ Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 6 TV SPORTS With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 7 MONO MOVIE This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. APPENDIX 5 English 35 0106HTR5490_31-35_EN(UA) 35 01.7.6, 6:11 PM TUNING Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China model only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on FM AM the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 100kHz/10kHz 50kHz/9kHz FREQUENCY STEP AM loop antenna (included) 2 Indoor FM antenna (included) 3 (U.S.A. model) 3 COMPONENT VIDEO PR/ CR PB/ CB Y 1 DVD D-TV / LD Orient the AM loop antenna for the beat reception. MONITOR OUT TUNER AM ANT GND y 75Ω UNBAL. • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. FM ANT Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. 36 0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 36 01.7.6, 6:12 PM TUNING 4 Automatic and Manual Tuning When using the remote control to proceed some of the steps in “TUNING”, make sure the “TUNER” mode is selected. PRESET/ TUNING VCR 1 A SP A INPUT DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD AM 1404 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON y A/B/C/D/E SPEAKERS A B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES STEREO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX – + + ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. 4 32 3 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” on left. Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. INPUT STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD or TUNING MODE Front panel Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING EDIT to turn it off. Remote control 2 AUTO Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. PRESET /TUNING VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD TUNED FM/AM EDIT SP A A AM 1404 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. CD APPENDIX If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING EDIT to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. PRESET/ TUNING Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION or 3 ADVANCED OPERATION POWER BASIC OPERATION 1 ■ Automatic tuning 1 PREPARATION When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT M0DE D TV/LD TUNED 1 NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER CBL/SAT INTRODUCTION There are 2 ways of tuning; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. TUNED EDIT SP A A AM 1404 English 37 0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 37 01.7.6, 6:12 PM TUNING Notes Presetting Stations ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 40). INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 39. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 39. PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E SPEAKERS A B PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h (A/B/ C/D/E and PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING EDIT to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES STEREO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX + – + 132 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP VOLUME AUTO MEMORY SP A A1:FM L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 38 0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 38 01.7.6, 6:12 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. VOLUME 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E SPEAKERS A B PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE PRESET/ TUNING TREBLE + TV VOL TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION PHONES STEREO or MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX – + CH + TV MUTE SELECT – Front panel PRESET CH + INTRODUCTION INPUT INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET TV VOL – 1 2,5 Remote control Tune in to a station. See page 37 for tuning instructions. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE A AM CD R V AUX VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP 576 kHz SP A VOLUME L 5 PHONO C3:AM 576 kHz VOLUME V AUX R VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME TUNED MAN'L/AUTO FM SP A C3:AM 576 kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication. SET MENU + TITLE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH TV MUTE SELECT – Front panel PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL – RETURN ADVANCED OPERATION Flashes LEVEL L Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. MEMORY The station band and frequency MAN'L/AUTO FM appear on the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MEMORY or CD BASIC OPERATION Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. A/B/C/D/E TUNER R MEMORY 3 CD R TUNED When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. 2 VCR2/DVR PREPARATION 3 4 DISPLAY Remote control VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP VOLUME APPENDIX V AUX MEMORY SP A C :AM 576 kHz L R English 39 0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 39 01.7.6, 6:12 PM TUNING Tuning in to a Preset Station Exchanging Preset Stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A B A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT – VIDEO AUX – + + SPEAKERS A B A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE TUNER PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT 1 2 SET MENU + TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB STEREO 1 2 LEVEL 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 9 /DTS SUR. SELECT CH 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX TV VOL – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 EFFECT Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. /DTS SUR. or MENU PRESET /TUNING 3 CH TV MUTE SELECT Front panel VCR 1 SP A EDIT TV VOL – + PRESET – V AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP TUNED MEMORY SP A DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP E1:FM 87.50 MHz VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP VOLUME TUNED MEMORY 4 D TV/LD D TV/LD TV VOL SP A CBL/SAT CBL/SAT Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING. (A/B/C/E/D and PRESET j / i on the remote control) “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. Remote control VCR 1 CHP/INDEX TUNED MEMORY PRESET/ TUNING CH 12 +10 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. + PRESET 6.1/ES 11 0 2 Remote control or 8 SELECT 10 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING. (A/B/C/E/D and PRESET j / i on the remote control) See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on left. A/B/C/D/E Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. ROCK CONCERT 1 SET MENU A/B/C/D/E 2 STEREO RETURN 9 Front panel + PRESET ON SCREEN MOVIE THEATER 2 1 CH TV MUTE SELECT – 1,3 1,3 A/B/C/D/E TEST 6.1/ES 10 MENU TV VOL PRESET ROCK CONCERT MUTE SET MENU + TITLE TV INPUT EFFECT MOVIE THEATER 2 + MUTE A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT – – MENU TV VOL CH + 1,3 1,3 2,4 LEVEL TITLE – VIDEO AUX E1:FM 87.50 MHz A5:FM 90.6 MHz L Press PRESET/TUNING EDIT again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 PRESET /TUNING CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER SP A EDIT E1-A5 Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. 40 40 CD MEMORY EDIT 0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) R 01.7.6, 6:12 PM BASIC RECORDING 2 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L PRO LOGIC STANDBY /ON B PROCESSOR BASS DIRECT EXTENSION A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING STEREO PROGRAM PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY BASS TUNING MODE TREBLE TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO EDIT PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP EFFECT SILENT TRANSMIT – VIDEO AUX RE–NAME CLEAR + – + LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY POWER 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. AMP REC Turn on the power of this unit and all connected component. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. A PHONO V-AUX D-TV/LD TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD INPUT or ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Timer playback/recording Remote control This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation instruction for the component and the timer to be used. English Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. 41 0107HTR5490_36-41_EN(UA) 41 01.7.6, 6:12 PM APPENDIX Notes • The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output during the recording with a timer, turn the volume down. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Front panel ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION 2 SLEEP • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. PREPARATION SPEAKERS A Notes INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes. This remote control also has a sophisticated Learn feature. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote control receiver. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room. Notes • For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7. • For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7. Control Area ■ Control area of this unit ■ Control area for each component The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown below. You can use the functions within this area no matter which component control area is selected when the AMP mode is selected. The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each component has different functions for the operation buttons in the component control area. The component which has been chosen by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n can be controlled and the display window shows the corresponding name of the component to be operated. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD TRANSMIT Å button and input selector buttons SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, 6CH INPUT, VOL +/ –, MUTE and STEREO) function in any mode. Å button and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å button is to operate the other component that is not connected to this unit. Factory setting is YAMAHA LD player. RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY 6CH INPUT SLEEP A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN MUTE MENU – STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 /DTS SUR. SELECT SELECT k/n switch the control area for another component independently from the input selected by an input selector button. The display window will show one of the following: (when pressing n, in the reverse order when pressing k) A, PHONO, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, CBSAT, MD, CD-R, TV-LD, VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD. POWER 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX AMP AV POWER POWER REC TV AV AUDIO + DISC SKIP REC VOL AUDIO DISC SKIP LEVEL TITLE – MUTE SET MENU + MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E LEVEL CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT TV INPUT + TV VOL HALL 1 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 + MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E PRESET TEST RETURN SET MENU TITLE PRESET 6.1/ES 10 POWER TV – CH ON SCREENTV MUTE STEREO CH – DISPLAY + SELECT PRESET EFFECT PRESET TEST ROCKON SCREEN CHURCH JAZZ CLUB CONCERT TV VOL 2 RETURN 3 – 4 DISPLAY MOVIE TV MONO THEATER 1 CLUB SPORTS HALL MOVIECHURCH JAZZ 6 1 7 2 8 10 0 5 11 +10 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 6 12 ROCK CONCERT 3 /DTSENTERTV MONO SUR.TAINMENT 6.1/ESMOVIE SELECTSPORTS 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 7 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. SELECT 8 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Component control area There are 12 component control areas. You can set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in each area. See pages 47 to 51. 42 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 42 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code 3 The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. Component category (Library) Input area + TV VOL Manufacturer CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET LD YAMAHA TV – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA CD YAMAHA VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA CD-R CD-R YAMAHA D-TV/LD TV – VCR 1 VCR – VCR 2/DVR VCR – DVD 1 DVD YAMAHA Press an input selector button or Å to select the component you want to set up. TV VOL – If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different component from the input selector name. Library choices: DVD, LD, CD, CD-R, MD, TAPE, TUNER, TV, CABLE, DBS, SAT, VCR Note If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one as checking if it works following step 4. 4 STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP ADVANCED OPERATION SYSTEM POWER Press one of the buttons shaded below to check if it works for the component being set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting has been correctly made. BASIC OPERATION CD V-AUX + PRESET PREPARATION A PHONO CH INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each component control area. Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. + VOL Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT SET MENU + TV VOL MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E y • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. LEARN 5 APPENDIX Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Notes • Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process is started. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. Notes 43 01.7.6, 6:12 PM English • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. 43 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – 2 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. CD 6CH INPUT LEARN SLEEP CLEAR TUNER RE–NAME STANDBY TRANSMIT PHONO DVD CD-R A MD/TAPE SYSTEM VCR2/DVR POWER VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER + D-TV/LD TV AUDIO POWER REC DISC SKIP – VOL If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so the buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. 4 Note • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) 1 5 LEARN Flashes alternately CLEAR LEARN RE–NAME Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode. TRANSMIT CD 6CH INPUT 3 CD SLEEP LEARN TUNER CLEAR STANDBY DVD CD-R RE–NAME PHONO MD/TAPE TRANSMIT A VCR2/DVR SYSTEM POWER VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER D-TV/LD TV POWER 1 to 4 cm (approximately 1 inch) 6CH INPUT Place this remote control and the other remote control 1 to 4 cm apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. SLEEP 2 TUNER DVD STANDBY VCR2/DVR PHONO VCR 1 A D-TV/LD SYSTEM CD-R POWER MD/TAPE DVD CBL/SAT CD-R V-AUX VCR2/DVR CD MD/TAPE VCR 1 6CH INPUT TUNER AMP SLEEP PHONO SELECT STANDBY A CBL/SAT SYSTEM POWER V-AUX AV POWER D-TV/LD TV POWER Press an input selector button or Å to select a source component. Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. Notes • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 4. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make further learning on the remote control. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. LEARN Notes • Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote control. • When the remote controls are either too close together or too far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control. • Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays. • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing more than one button at once. Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5 and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 4. 44 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 44 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Changing the Source Name in the Display Window 1 You can clear the function learned in a certain programmable button in each area. 1 Press an input selector button or Å to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. Press an input selector button or Å to select the source component you want to do “One Button Clear”. The selected component name appears in the display window. SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT TUNER CD A PHONO V-AUX 3 A PHONO V-AUX D-TV/LD SLEEP CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 2 Press RE-NAME by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME LEARN Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character in the following order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen) and / (slash). (Pressing u goes in the reverse order.) CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL Press the button that you want to clear for 3 seconds as pressing CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR – 4 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. LEARN + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. Repeat step 3 and 4 until the new name is completed. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 + TV VOL 4 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. BASIC OPERATION 2 STANDBY PREPARATION POWER SYSTEM POWER INTRODUCTION You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use the different name from the original input selector button names. This is useful when different component is set in the input selector button. One Button Clear TV VOL – y 5 APPENDIX • If you continuously want to rename another source component, press SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME English 45 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 45 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing Learned Functions, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes 1 4 Press an input selector button or Å to select the area for which you want to clear the name, function or manufacturer code. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD Note 2 V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. CLEAR CLEAR Note Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2 and 3, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over from step 1. 3 • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. Press u / d to select the clear mode. The mode is shown in the display window in the following order: + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions for the component area. Clears all learned functions for this unit control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all renamed source names in the display window. Clears all programmed functions including setup manufacturer codes. This returns to the factory settings. 46 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 46 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Each Component Control Area ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR ■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas) LEARN TRANSMIT 6CH INPUT POWER RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP STANDBY SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER POWER TV AV SELECT Power AUDIO + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT – + PRESET ON SCREEN – STEREO Up/down, left/ right and SELECT DISPLAY EFFECT AMP Power REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + Search backward – LEVEL SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT MUTE A/B/C/D/E * CH – VCR Channel up/down TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY DISPLAY STEREO EFFECT ROCK CONCERT CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES SELECT 6.1/ES 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Numeric buttons MOVIE THEATER 2 Title/index 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Enter * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV volume +/–, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION * TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. Search forward MENU HALL MOVIE THEATER 2 Stop ADVANCED OPERATION Numeric buttons AV VOL MENU CH TV VOL POWER TV TITLE A/B/C/D/E TEST POWER Play MENU TV MUTE SELECT PRESET RETURN MUTE Skip forward Play Search forward * Pause Record BASIC OPERATION AUDIO CH RETURN AMP REC DISC SKIP PREPARATION A Skip backward Search backward Stop Title 6CH INPUT V-AUX SELECT * Pause DISC SKIP LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER INTRODUCTION The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button or Å, or SELECT k / n to select a component you want to control. APPENDIX English 47 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 47 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/ LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/SAT area) TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR ■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area) TRANSMIT LEARN RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER STANDBY SLEEP POWER POWER TV AV A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT * AMP (Power) REC (Record) AUDIO DISC SKIP + – LEVEL TV INPUT Channel up/down TITLE + TV VOL TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SET MENU PRESET (Search forward) CH + ON SCREEN – – SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT * CH – MENU CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN – CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT Numeric buttons 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 TV SPORTS 6 /DTS SUR. MONO MOVIE 7 8 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Display EFFECT HALL Numeric buttons MOVIE THEATER 1 SELECT STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL Search forward MUTE PRESET TEST STEREO Power Sound Play Skip forward A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET DISPLAY + VOL TITLE Volume up/down AMP REC LEVEL MENU TV VOL AV DISC SKIP PRESET TEST RETURN POWER TV Skip backward Stop Search backward MUTE A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT Pause POWER AUDIO VOL Play (Search backward) 6CH INPUT V-AUX SELECT POWER (Pause) LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM The buttons in parentheses above (AV POWER, REC, d, w, t/y, a) function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 Enter/12 CHURCH 1 ENTERTAINMENT 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Chapter/time Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 43 because TV is factory-set for this input selector button. * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 48 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 48 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN TRANSMIT 6CH INPUT POWER RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP STANDBY SLEEP A PHONO TUNER CD A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER TV AV AMP * Power REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – Search backward LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + CH – – LEVEL * + STEREO Display CH – SET MENU + TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL – Numeric buttons CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 HALL Numeric buttons 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 7 8 5 SELECT 6.1/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Index 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Index ADDITIONAL INFORMATION * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. ADVANCED OPERATION * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. ROCK CONCERT 3 MONO MOVIE 6 10 JAZZ CLUB 2 TV SPORTS TV SPORTS 9 CHURCH 1 ENTERTAINMENT 5 /DTS SUR. Display EFFECT ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER 2 STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT HALL Skip forward Play Search forward Stop MENU PRESET TEST RETURN MUTE Power Pause A/B/C/D/E PRESET DISPLAY + VOL TITLE ON SCREEN – DISC SKIP TV INPUT TV VOL RETURN AUDIO A/B/C/D/E CH AMP REC Search backward MUTE PRESET TEST AV MENU TV MUTE SELECT PRESET Search forward POWER TV BASIC OPERATION TV VOL TV INPUT Play Skip forward Record (MD recorder only) Skip backward POWER PREPARATION POWER Skip backward * 6CH INPUT V-AUX SELECT * Pause DISC SKIP LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER INTRODUCTION TRANSMIT ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/ TAPE area) APPENDIX English 49 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 49 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating an tape deck (MD/TAPE area) TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) LEARN TRANSMIT 6CH INPUT POWER SYSTEM POWER RE–NAME CLEAR SLEEP STANDBY SLEEP A PHONO TUNER CD A PHONO TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER POWER TV AV AUDIO + VOL – Search backward LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET SELECT AMP REC DISC SKIP Direction A * MUTE Power A/B Play Direction B Search forward Stop * POWER TV AV – LEVEL TITLE ON SCREEN Preset down CH – SET MENU + TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET STEREO MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E CH Preset up + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES MOVIE THEATER 2 SELECT 6.1/ES EFFECT MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX EFFECT Preset stations Index * TV POWER, TV INPUT, TV channel +/–, TV volume +/– and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 9 /DTS SUR. 50 ROCK CONCERT 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX * TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 50 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) + VOL TV INPUT + Power AUDIO MENU CH AMP REC DISC SKIP PRESET TEST POWER A/B/C/D/E TV VOL Numeric buttons 6CH INPUT V-AUX SELECT * Pause Record LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY 01.7.6, 6:12 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the component set in Å INTRODUCTION This button is not an input selector button but simply provides the space for an extra component to control with this unit’s remote control without making connection to this unit. The shaded area shown below can be used for the component set in Å and the function for each button differs depending on the component. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR PREPARATION YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in Å. However if you want to set other component, set the manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the Å button following the manufacturer code setting procedure described on page 43. LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – LEVEL SET MENU + TITLE TV VOL TV INPUT MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT – MUTE PRESET ADVANCED OPERATION CH The functions of these buttons in the component control area differ for the component you set in Å. BASIC OPERATION TV POWER functions to turn on and off your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. POWER CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN TV VOL STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 EFFECT MOVIE THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. ROCK CONCERT SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 51 0108HTR5490_42-51_EN(UA) 51 01.7.6, 6:12 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 14 items including the speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. y • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN REC SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT AUDIO DISC SKIP A PHONO V-AUX D-TV/LD TUNER CD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – SELECT PRESET CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL 1 POWER POWER TV AV – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 EFFECT 6 MOVIE THEATER 2 SPEAKER SET 9 1A CENTER SP ROCK CONCERT 4,5 REC 5 1 STEREO RETURN AMP 2 3,6 PRESET TEST • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT Note + VOL 7 /DTS SUR. SELECT 8 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Note 1B MAIN SP • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 1C REAR L/R SP 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 1D REAR CT SP 1E LFE/BASS OUT AMP 1F MAIN LEVEL 2 SET MENU 1/4 SET MENU LOW FRQ TEST ≥ 1 2 3 4 MENU 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL 5 CENTER GEQ 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to 14) you want to adjust. + CH 7B OPTICAL OUT SET MENU 1/4 TV VOL 7A CMPNT-V INPUT – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 7C OPTICAL IN SPEAKER SET LOW FRQ TEST L/R BALANCE HP TONE CTRL / : Up/Down -/+ : Enter CH + PRESET TV VOL 1 ≥ 2 3 4 SPEAKER SET LOW FRQ TEST L/R BALANCE HP TONE CTRL / : Up/Down -/+ : Enter – 7D COAXIAL IN 8 INPUT MODE 9 PARAM. INI y • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 4 10 LFE LEVEL 11 DYNAMIC RANGE 12 SP DELAY TIME 13 DISPLAY SET Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. + 2 LOW FRQ TEST TV VOL 14 MEMORY GUARD CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET ≥ TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz CH + PRESET TV VOL – 52 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 52 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. + 2 LOW FRQ TEST TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – + PRESET TV VOL Notes – 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 2 LOW FRQ TEST CH TV MUTE SELECT – ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz + PRESET PRESET TV VOL – 6 + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET HALL CH + or – ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 SELECT 6.1/ES 9 TV VOL JAZZ CLUB ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER 2 PRESET CHURCH /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. 1A CENTER SP ADVANCED OPERATION LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1A CENTER SP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) BASIC OPERATION Press u/d repeatedly until the menu disappears or simply press one of the DSP program group button to exit from the SET MENU. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B,1E and 1F are possible, but those in items 1A,1C and 1D are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. PREPARATION + TV VOL CH Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. INTRODUCTION CH PRESET TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) LRG SML NONE APPENDIX English 53 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 53 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the left and right main speakers. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. 1B MAIN SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. 1B MAIN SP 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL LRG SML NONE Note y • When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”. 54 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 54 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU ■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back and transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”. LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals are directed to both main right and left speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG 1D REAR CT SP Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH NONE Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and right rear speakers. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1D REAR CT SP ADVANCED OPERATION 1D REAR CT SP BASIC OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. PREPARATION LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to the rear center speaker. INTRODUCTION ■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center speaker mode) Note APPENDIX • The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main, center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D. English 55 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 55 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU ■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal 2 LOW FRQ TEST Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting with the remote control while sitting in the listening position. 1 Press j / i to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you can hear the tone. Normal Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 1F MAIN LEVEL Notes Normal -10dB –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. • Do not turn up the volume too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. 2 1F MAIN LEVEL Normal -10dB Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to select the frequency you want to use. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R ≥ FRQ……………………88Hz 56 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 56 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. Digital generator (wide band noise produced) Freq. Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL (treble) Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) 4 HP TONE CTRL ≥ BASS TRBL Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band - Control range: 10 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R Press j / i to adjust the level of that frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ 100Hz ≥ 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz Press i to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press j for the right main speaker. - +3dB + y 57 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 57 01.7.6, 6:12 PM English • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 23 and 24). APPENDIX -/+ : Adjust / : Exit + ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 0dB ADVANCED OPERATION ≥ 100Hz 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) L …………………… ……………………R 0 Press d to select a higher frequency and u to select a lower frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ Band pass filter 3 L/R BALANCE 0dB 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) 1 Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. + - BASIC OPERATION Noise Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. PREPARATION The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter. You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. INTRODUCTION ■ About the test tone 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) SET MENU 6 INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. 1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT l / h) to select the input you want to change the name of. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD -/+ : Position / : Character 2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD [B] D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] D-TV/LD -/+ : Position / : Character 7A CMPNT-V INPUT ≥ [A]…………… DVD [B]……………D-TV/LD 3 Press u/d to select the character you want to use and j / i to move to the next one. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ DVD1 -/+ : Position / : Character ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD (2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE (2) CD-R 7B OPTICAL OUT ≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE (2)…………… CD-R Note • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. 58 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 58 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3) to (6) Choices: AUTO LAST -/+ : Select / : Exit Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7) and (8) (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R (8) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONE, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1 Initial settings: (7) CD (8) CBL/SAT ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: BASIC OPERATION (3)…………… CD (4)…………… CD-R ≥ (5)…………… DVD (6)……………D-TV/LD 8 INPUT MODE PREPARATION 7C OPTICAL IN Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 27 for details about the input mode). INTRODUCTION (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R (4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE (5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD (6) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT Initial settings: (3) CD (4) CD-R (5) DVD (6) D-TV/LD 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 7D COAXIAL IN (7)…………… CD ≥ (8)………CBL/SAT Note APPENDIX • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. English 59 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 59 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the DSP program that you want to initialize. The asterisk (*) next to the program number means that the parameter values have been changed. 9 PARAM. INI 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 10 LFE LEVEL This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE 1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted. *10 Press No. Key 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER………………0dB HEADPHONE…………0dB Notes • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. • The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk mark (*). • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 62), you cannot initialize any program groups. • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings. 2 Press j to adjust the LFE level. 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB HEADPHONE…………0dB Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 60 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 60 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU 11 D-RANGE (dynamic range) 11 D-RANGE ≥ SP: MAX STD MIN HP: MAX STD MIN STD Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use. Control range: 0 to 5 ms for CENTER 0 to 30 ms for REAR CENTER Initial setting: 0 ms for CENTER 3 ms for REAR CENTER Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay of the center and the rear center channel sounds. ADVANCED OPERATION 12 SP DELAY TIME BASIC OPERATION MIN Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at extremely low volume levels. PREPARATION MAX Select the “MAX” setting for feature films. Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when this unit decodes DTS or Dolby Digital signals. Ideally, the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right Main speakers. However, in most home situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. 12 SP DELAY TIME ≥ CENTER…………………0ms REAR CNTR…………3ms Center speaker image ADDITIONAL INFORMATION C L R RC RR APPENDIX RL C RC y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. English 61 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 61 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SET MENU 13 DISPLAY SET 13 DISPLAY SET ≥ BLUE BACK………AUTO OSD SHIFT………………0 DIMMER………………………0 14 MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF 14 MEMORY GUARD ■ BLUE BACK OFF Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a blue background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen including the onscreen display if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Initial setting: AUTO ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Press j to raise the position of the OSD. -/+ : Select / : Exit Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Notes • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 62 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 62 ON 01.7.6, 6:12 PM ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS Adjustment should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or left and right rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. LEARN + SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP TV VOL 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. REC AUDIO DISC SKIP CH + – TV MUTE SELECT CH + VOL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD – LEVEL TITLE SELECT CH 1 POWER POWER TV AV SET MENU + TV VOL – AMP TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + ON SCREEN TV VOL RETURN 2 2 PRESET TEST REC MUTE MENU A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT – STEREO DISPLAY EFFECT 3 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear, rear center, left rear and subwoofer. AMP LEVEL – Notes • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP” and “1C REAR L/R SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • It is recommended to adjust the speakers (except for a subwoofer) by following the steps described in Using the Test Tone on pages 23 and 24. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. ADVANCED OPERATION TITLE TV INPUT TV VOL BASIC OPERATION 1 PRESET PREPARATION D-TV/LD PRESET Center speaker output level ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Right rear speaker output level Rear center speaker output level Left rear speaker output level APPENDIX Subwoofer output level y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d / u. + TV VOL LEVEL CH PRESET – TV MUTE SELECT English TITLE TV INPUT CH + PRESET TV VOL – 63 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 63 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). 3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. CONCERT HALL L R y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. Canceling the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. Setting the Sleep Timer TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD SLEEP 2 1 y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly SLEEP to set the amount of time before this unit automatically turns off. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A SLEEP 120min L R 64 0109HTR5490_52-64_EN(UA) 64 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on pages 67 to 70. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. ADVANCED OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. BASIC OPERATION Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 70 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. PREPARATION ■ Elements of a sound field Sound Field Program Parameters INTRODUCTION What is a sound field? APPENDIX English 65 0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 65 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING 4 Changing Parameter Settings Press u / d to select the parameter. You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 5 Adjustments should be made with the remote control. Press j / i to change the parameter value. + TV VOL y CH – • We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display. TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – y TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP 6CH INPUT A PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP 6 VOL D-TV/LD VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD – LEVEL SET MENU + TITLE SELECT TV VOL TV INPUT CH 1 POWER POWER TV AV PRESET STEREO RETURN – DISPLAY HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 6 7 8 4 2 EFFECT 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 9 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. 3 + ON SCREEN TV VOL 5 REC CH PRESET TEST ROCK CONCERT SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX 3 AMP ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select a DSP program you want to adjust. ROCK CONCERT HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 9 SELECT 6.1/ES 10 11 12 0 +10 CHP/INDEX Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT – AMP MUTE Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory-set values Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold j / i until the value temporarily stops at the factoryset value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. ■ To reset all of the parameters to the factory-set values Program No. Program name P04 ROCK CONCERT Cursor ≥ INIT.DLY…………15ms ROOM SIZE…………1.0 LIVENESS…………………5 REV.TIME…………1.6s REV.DELAY……120ms REV.LEVEL……………7% Parameters Parameter valves Example of the parameter setting display Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory-set values (see page 60). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press u / d. • You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 62). 66 0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 66 01.7.6, 6:12 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) [P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Function: Description: Control Range 1 – 99 msec Sound Source Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time INIT.DLY Time INIT.DLY INIT.DLY BASIC OPERATION Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms Description: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Sound Source ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ROOM SIZE [P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Function: PREPARATION This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a large room, it would be set to a large value. INTRODUCTION You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. Time Sound Source APPENDIX Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 English 67 0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 67 01.7.6, 6:12 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Sound Source Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Time Sound Source Small Reflected Sound Large Reflected Sound Small value = 0 ■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Function: Large value = 10 Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the surround sound. ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. ■ RC. INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Function: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. ■ RC. LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. ■ RC. ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Function: Control Range 0 –10 Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. 68 0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 68 01.7.6, 6:12 PM DIGITAL SOUND SOUND FIELD FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS EDITING ■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Function: Reverberation Sound Source Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB Sound Source 60 dB REV. TIME REV. TIME Long Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) ADVANCED OPERATION Level Description: Control Range 0 – 250 msec This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. BASIC OPERATION Small value = 1.0 s Function: PREPARATION REV. TIME Short Reverberation INTRODUCTION Description: Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Sound Source (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV. TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Sound Source APPENDIX Level Function: Description: Control Range 0 – 100 % ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REV. DELAY REV. LEVEL English Time 69 0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 69 01.7.6, 6:12 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS For 6ch Stereo ■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Function: ■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Function: Music ■ PANORAMA Control Range OFF/ON Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control Range –3 – STD – +3 Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. ■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. For PRO LOGIC Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. ■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. Control Range 0 – 7 Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 70 0110HTR5490_65-70_EN(UA) 70 01.7.6, 6:12 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Firmly connect the power cord. 19 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in the standby mode. 19 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 12, 13 On-screen display does not appear. The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 21 The BLUE BACK setting under “9 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is input to this unit. Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 62 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11 – 17 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 25 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 25 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 26 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 26 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The picture does not appear. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components) for both the input and output. 14, 15 The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. 13 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. 12, 13 12, 13 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 26 English 64 71 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 71 01.7.6, 6:12 PM APPENDIX Turn on the power, and play the source again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The sleep timer has functioned. ADVANCED OPERATION No sound and/or no picture. BASIC OPERAIONT The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. PREPARATION This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Only the speaker on one side can be heard. No sound from the effect speakers. Cause Remedy Refer to page Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12, 13 Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 57 The sound effect is off. Press STEREO to turn it on. 30 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 28 – 35 A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. 27 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 63 “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 53 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 7) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 10. Select another DSP program. “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 55 “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 55 The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. No sound from the rear center speaker. A “humming” sound can be heard. 63 31 – 35 — “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. 55 The output mode for each speaker (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML. 55 6.1/ES is not on. Press the 6.1/ES button on the remote control to turn it on. 30 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11 – 17 No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 16, 17 72 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 31 – 35 72 01.7.6, 6:12 PM 53 – 56 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Remedy Refer to page The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 62 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of this unit. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — 16, 17 16 41 INTRODUCTION Problem 11 – 17 PREPARATION BASIC OPERAIONT 12, 13 ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 73 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 73 01.7.6, 6:12 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem FM AM Cause Remedy Refer to page FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. 36, 37 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 36 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. Use the manual tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 36 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 74 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 74 01.7.6, 6:12 PM 36, 37 38 36, 37 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones and press RESET. 3 The internal microcomputer has “frozen”. Remove the batteries from the battery compartment once and then put them back. 3 The batteries of this remote control and/ or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 44 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. 44 Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary functions. The internal microcomputer has “frozen”. Remove the batteries from the battery compartment once and then put them back. 3 The learning process is incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function button on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. 44 BASIC OPERAIONT 45, 46 ADVANCED OPERATION After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Continuous functions such as volume adjustment are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. Refer to page PREPARATION The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Remedy INTRODUCTION The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause APPENDIX English 75 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 75 01.7.6, 6:12 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ Dolby Digital ■ Neo: 6 Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with two left and right main channels, a center channel, and two left and right rear channels compared with one limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic technology. Also the music mode is available for 2channel sources in addition to the movie mode. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ CINEMA DSP D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. 76 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 76 01.7.6, 6:12 PM GLOSSARY ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP ■ S VIDEO signal ■ Component video signal ■ I/O assignment (SET MENU) Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ PCM (Linear PCM) BASIC OPERAIONT With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. PREPARATION With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits INTRODUCTION YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. APPENDIX English 77 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 77 01.7.6, 6:12 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 80 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 145 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China model] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 125 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 105/130/170/200 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.04% AM SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted) [U.S.A., Canada and China models] ................................. 86 dB [Other models] ................................................................... 81 dB CD (200 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................... 98 dB • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT .................................................... 150 mV/40 – 47 kΩ • Output Level REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/0.9 kΩ PRE OUT .................................................................. 2.6 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 260 W [Canada model] ...................................................... 270 W/370 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 360 W Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.5 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................. 2 (Total 80 W maximum) [China model] ........................................ 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia model] .......................................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ............................ 435 x 171 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17”) • Weight ......................................................................... 15 kg (33 lbs) VIDEO SECTION • Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control ....................................................................................... Batteries ......................................................................... AM loop antenna ...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ........................................................................ Connection Guide • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL *Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • S-Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω • Component Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB 78 0111HTR5490_71-78_EN(UA) 78 01.7.9, 11:05 AM U HTR-5490 AV Receiver IMPORTANT YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100HTR5490(U)-cv1/4 1 OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia V795350 01.7.18, 9:33 AM Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference.-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-5490 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-5490 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha HTR-5490 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha HTR-5490 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha HTR-5490 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-5490 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha HTR-5490 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-5490 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-5490 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha HTR-5490 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-5490 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-5490 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha HTR-5490 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha HTR-5490 Manual de utilizare